Innovative Systems APmax System User Manual
Below you will find brief information for APmax. APmax provides advanced TDM and IP telephony features, acting as a Service Control Point (SCP) in the SS7 Network while meeting North American Public Switching Telephone Network (PSTN) industry standards for operations and reliability. It supports T1 communication channels, SS7 interfaces, and Ethernet ports.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Innovative Systems
APmax User Manual
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
DOCUMENT NUMBER: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Mitchell, South Dakota
Document History APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Document History
Version
4.3.01
4.3.02
4.3.03
4.3.04
4.3.05
4.3.06
4.3.0.7
4.3.08
4.3.09
4.3.10
Changes
DCR-1966. Initial Revision.
Release Date
April 03, 2013
DCR-2000. Log Reader updated for Save and Transfer Mode functions.
Report Viewer updated with information about scheduled report success logs. Updated Login instructions for Master APmax option. Added Status
Bar information and updated UI default preferences.
July 01, 2013
DCR-2009. Report Viewer updated for Copy Results function. User Preferences updated for Reporting Server changes. Alarm History added. Test
DSP Access added. Basic Conferencing allows 7-digit access numbers.
Patch and Utility packages added to pre-staging. User Access Rights and
Quick Launch Bar updated.
DCR-2038. Subscriber Management updated for Centrex Extension and
CASS™ certification changes.
DCR-2050. FTP Transfer Service added. Master APmax updated.
November 14, 2013
February 18, 2014
April 11, 2014
June 02, 2014 DCR-2058. License Viewer allows alarm thresholds to be set. Alarm notification e-mails allowed.
DCR-2066. Single Web Portal updated. System Upgrade Manager added.
August 11, 2014
DCR-54259. SSL Setup, System Upgrade Manager updated. Hardware
Maintenance added.
January 26, 2015
July 02, 2015 DCR-58970. Daily Log Analysis Tool added. Fan Replacement procedure added. Web Portal settings updated.
DCR-60382. FTP Client Backup added. Log Reader updated.
October 27, 2015
Acknowledgements:
Windows
®
7, Windows
®
8 and Excel
®
are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Silverlight™ is a tradermark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.."
Google and Google Maps are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
®
is a registered trademark of Facebook Inc.
iPhone
®
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
The following trademarks are owned by the United States Postal Service
®
: CASS, CASS Certified, United
States Postal Service, and ZIP Code.
© 2013-2015 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
All rights reserved.
Printed in United States of America.
Information subject to change without notice.
Innovative Systems
™
is a trademark of Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-iInnovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Preface
Preface
Throughout this manual the term APmax will be used in reference to the Innovative Systems
APmax product, including one or more physical APmax units and systems. The term APmax UI will be used in reference to the APmax User Interface software that is used to administer the
APmax systems. See Part 1 - "Introduction to APmax" in this manual for more information on
these terms.
The following sections describe the sources provided for Innovative Systems APmax product information in addition to the APmax User Manual.
Online Help
The APmax UI software comes with extensive online help. The online help can be accessed by pressing the F1 key when the focus is on any interface within the APmax UI software.
Screenshots
The appearance of some of your APmax UI windows, including common control windows (e.g.,
Printer Setup, Message Boxes, File Selection) may differ from the samples included in this manual and the APmax online help due to software updates, hardware updates and local PC differences in Windows or other third-party software versions.
Innovative Systems Technical Support
If you have a question or problem concerning APmax that is not answered in this document, please contact our APmax Technical Support department using one of the following methods:
Phone
Monday-Friday
8:00 am - 5:00 pm CST/CDT
(605) 995-6120
After Hours Emergency Support: (605) 333-4609
Online Support
http://www.innovsys.com/innovsys/apapmax-support/
APmax Support
Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
1000 Innovative Drive
Mitchell, SD 57301
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-iiInnovative Systems, L.L.C.
Table of Contents APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Table of Contents
Part 1 - Introduction to APmax 1
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.3.2 Command Center Items & Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.3.4.3 Reporting Server Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.4 APmax System Administration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.1.1 Adding a System Region
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.1.2 Editing a System Region Name
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.1.3 Deleting a System Region
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.1.4 System Regions in the Command Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-iiiInnovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Table of Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Part 2 - System Configuration 61
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.1.1.5 Tie Line Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.3 Elation Messenger Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 5 - System Time Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
5.1 Manually Setting the System Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Chapter 6 - Serial Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-ivInnovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Table of Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
9.1 Trunk Group General Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Chapter 10 - SIP Registration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
10.1 SIP Client Registration Management
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
10.2 SIP Client Registration Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
11.1 General Internet Access Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-vInnovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Table of Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
11.2.2.1 Obtaining a Google Provider Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
11.2.2.2 Obtaining a Facebook Provider Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Chapter 12 - Phone Number Format
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Part 3 - System Maintenance 191
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
13.1.3 Remove Dust From Foam Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
14.1.4.3 Information Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-viInnovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Table of Contents
Chapter 15 - FTP Transfer Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Chapter 16 - Package Management
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
16.1 Package Management Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
17.3 Report Management Operations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chapter 18 - System Upgrade Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267
Part 4 - System Surveillance 273
Chapter 19 - Alarm Status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Chapter 21 - Ethernet Switch Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-viiInnovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Table of Contents
Chapter 22 - Log Reader
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Chapter 23 - SS7 Status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
299
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Chapter 24 - Daily Log Analysis Tool
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
303
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Part 5 - Services 309
Chapter 25 - License Viewer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
26.1 Subscriber Management Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
26.1.1.1 Gathering Subscriber Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
26.1.1.2 Subscribers List Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
26.1.1.5 Adding Billing Service Addresses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
26.1.1.6 Deleting Billing Service Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
26.1.1.7 Adding Service Groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
26.1.1.9 Adding Subscriber Services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
26.1.1.10 Deleting Subscriber Services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
26.1.4.1 Internet Access Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-viiiInnovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Part 1 - Introduction to
APmax
General Description
The APmax is a next generation IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Application Server (AS), created to provide advanced TDM and IP telephony features. It acts as a Service Control Point
(SCP) in the SS7 Network and meets North American Public Switching Telephone Network
(PSTN) industry standards for operations and reliability. This manual is intended to provide the general information needed to setup and operate the APmax.
New users of this product should review most of the contents of Part 1 - "Introduction to APmax".
Part 1 provides instructions for installing the APmax hardware (see Chapter 1 - "Hardware Instal-
lation"), the APmax UI software (Chapter 2 - "Installing the APmax UI"), and an overview of the
APmax UI software (see Chapter 3 - "Getting Started"). A more in-depth discussion of configur-
ing communications, time, and other features for APmax systems is provided in Part 2 - "System
System Requirements
A personal computer (PC) is required for the APmax UI. The APmax UI is used to manage one or more APmax systems. The APmax UI PC should, at a minimum, meet the following requirements:
• Windows® 7 Professional, Windows® 7 Enterprise, Windows® 7 Ultimate, Windows® 8
Pro, or Windows® 8 Enterprise.
• Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5
• 1.5 GHz Intel® Core™2 Duo or faster processor
• 4 GB RAM
• 40 GB free space on hard disk drive
• Gigabit Network card
• Internet connection
In general, a PC exceeding the above requirements in processor, RAM, and disk drive capacities is strongly recommended. Increasing the capacity of any or all of these elements will result in faster APmax UI software response, thereby increasing user productivity and satisfaction.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-1Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
In addition to the above requirements, the APmax UI PC must be able to connect to the net-
work(s) on which the APmax systems reside. See Chapter 4 - "Network Configuration" for more
information on configuring communications with APmax systems.
The APmax UI has been developed using the latest Microsoft .NET technology and must run under the Microsoft .NET environment. Therefore the computer on which APmax UI software is installed must be running one of the Microsoft operating systems that support the .NET environment (see the System Requirements listed above). The .NET Framework version 4.5 must also be installed on the computer. If the appropriate runtime environment is not available on the computer when APmax UI is installed, a prompt to install the correct .NET Framework will be dis-
played. The installation procedure is outlined in Chapter 2 - "Installing the APmax UI".
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-2Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
1.1 General Information
The APmax is suitable for installation in network telecommunication facilities and in locations where the NEC applies. It is intended to provide many features. Each APmax unit provides:
• T1 communication channels
• SS7 interfaces
• Serial ports - RS232/RS449/V.35 capable
• Ethernet ports - for connection to the LAN, WAN, VoIP, and for inter-unit communication
The T1 trunks can be used to provide Announcements such as CLASS announcements. They also allow MF detection, DTMF detection, and voice feedback for some features. The T1 trunks are also used as an SS7 interface providing SS7 over T1. The APmax also supports ISUP signalling over the SS7 network, which is used to implement call-based services. Call-based services use T1 trunks to play announcements and carry telephone conversations. The SS7 interface can also be used for controlling the message waiting indicator (MWI) function.
The Ethernet channels are used for inter-unit communication in a system, and allow placing the
APmax on a local area network (LAN). The LAN connection can be used for maintenance and control and OPM reporting. The VoIP connection supports Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for call setup and Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) for audio data.
1.1.1 Parts List
Each APmax kit is shipped with:
• 2-APmax units
• 2-Ethernet cables (for inter-unit communication)
• 2-sets mounting brackets (for mounting in a 19” rack) with screws
• APmax User Interface Software (on CD-ROM)
• APmax Operating Software (pre-loaded)
• APmax User Manual (Softcopy PDF provided on APmax User Interface CD-ROM)
Required items not supplied with the kit:
• 2-T1 cable assemblies
• CAT5 or smilar cable to connect the APmax System to the computer network
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-3Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
• Fuse - 3A is recommended
Optional items not supplied with the kit:
• APmax Spare
• APmax User Manual, Printed
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
Depending on the type of APmax system configuration specified or the particular application(s) purchased with the system, other parts may be included and other software may be pre-loaded, in addition to what is specified here.
1.1.2 Specifications
The specifications listed in Table 1-1 - "Specifications" are per APmax unit.
Description
Table 1-1 Specifications
Physical Size (width x depth x height)
Weight
Physical Location
Mounting
Specification
1.75”H x 17”W x 14.25”D
10.5 lbs
Install in the Central Office (CO).
Brackets available for mounting in 19”,
23”, and 26” racks. 1 U space above and below the APmax system is strongly recommended.
Environmental
Operating Temperature Range
Relative Humidity
Power Requirement
Voltage
Current
Recommended External Fuse
Front Panel LEDs/Indicators
Power
Minor (alarm)
Major (alarm)
Critical (alarm)
65 to 110 o
-42 to -56 VDC
2.0A
3.0A
Green
Amber
Amber
Red
F (18 to 43 o
C)
10-90%, non-condensing
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-4Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
Description
Connections
Power and Alarm
Serial Ports
Ethernet
T1
Specification
8 Position Terminal Block
Two 25-Pin Female D-sub Connectors.
(RS232/RS449/V.35 capable)
Six RJ-45 Connectors
One 37-Pin Female Connector Providing Eight DS-1’s, Two BNC Connectors
(one Tx and one Rx Providing One DS-
3)
NOTE: For power and alarms connections, 18 AWG wire which meets UL 60950-1 requirements should be used (Belden 8899 or equivalent). For wire terminations, ring or spade terminals such as AMP 34144 of AMP 320665 should be used.
WARNING: The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or
Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed
OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
1.1.3 Rear and Front Views
The rear and front views of an APmax unit are shown in Figure 1-1 - "Rear and Front Views".
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 1-1 Rear and Front Views
-5Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
1.1.4 Redundancy
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
An APmax system consists of a pair of units in order to provide the redundancy necessary for telecommunications applications.
Each system contains a site-specific database. For true redundancy, the databases in each of the system’s two units are identical under normal operation conditions. If either unit should be unable to perform its function, either because of unit failure, a power failure, an SS7 link failure, or a T1 failure, the other unit will maintain service. In many cases, if one unit is removed and replaced, it will obtain the correct database from the mate unit when power is reapplied.
1.1.5 System Requirements
Each unit must be supplied with -48 VDC power. The two sets of power input connections should be tied to independent sources in order to provide redundant powering.
Each unit may be configured for SS7 communication over a T1 channel.
A personal computer running the APmax User Interface Software is required for configuration, administration, and maintenance of the APmax system.
1.1.6 Network Configuration
Each APmax system ships with a set of default Administration and Call Processing IPs. The Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) reside on the Call Processing network and their IPs are also defaulted before shipment.
It is required that the OAM&P (Administration) and VoIP (Call Processing) networks be located on separate physical networks. By keeping the VoIP network private quality of service is assured.
Improper configuration of the network, cabling, and IP assignment could result in loss of call processing, inability to administer the system, and subsequent loss of service.
1.1.7 Ethernet Cabling
The OAM&P (Administration) network connects to the APmax via the OAM&P port, port 1, on the APmax Ethernet switch.
The tielines are used to maintain redundant databases between the units. There are two tielines,
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-6Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
and they connect from port 5 to port 5 and port 6 to port 6.
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
If APmax web services such as Web Portal are to be used, the system’s Internet IPs must be configured accordingly and the WAN port, port 2, on each unit must be connected to the Internet.
The VoIP network connects to the APmax via the VoIP port, port 4. Whether or not the APmax will be used for VoIP will determine how the system should be cabled.
In addition to properly cabling the system, the Administration, Call Processing IPs, and DSP IPs must be configured accordingly. If the networks on which the APmax resides do not support the default IP ranges preconfigured before shipment, then the system IPs will need to be updated (see
Chapter 4 - "Network Configuration" for more information.)
NOTE: Setting the IPs on the APmax is done by sending a broadcast query from the UI to all units within the system. When changing the APmax IPs, the PC on which the UI runs must be on the same network as the APmax Administration network.
If VoIP is utilized, meaning the APmax will be hosting external VoIP traffic, the VoIP port, port
4, on each unit must be connected to the Call Processing network on which the APmax resides.
It is required that the OAM&P (Administration) and VoIP (Call Processing) networks be located on separate physical networks.
1.2 Procedure
1. Mount the APmax into the desired equipment rack using four # 10 panel bolts per unit.
The APmax should be mounted in a location such that cables and wiring reach the proper connections.
2. Connect one end of the chassis grounding wire to a ground bus. Connect the other end to
a two hole connector and then bolt one ground connection to each unit, see Figure 1-2 -
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-7Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
Figure 1-2 Ground Connection
3. Connect the -48 VDC and RTN to the APmax using the appropriate terminals, Figure 1-3
- "Terminal Connector". NOTE: Do not insert the fuse until installation is complete
Figure 1-3 Terminal Connector
4. Connect the alarm wires to the terminal strips, Figure 1-3 - "Terminal Connector".
5. Connect the APmax to the OAM&P network by connecting a LAN cable to Port 1 of each
unit, Figure 1-4 - "Ethernet Switch". NOTE: If the networks on which the APmax
resides do not support the default IP ranges preconfigured before shipment, then the sys-
tem IPs will need to be updated (see Chapter 4 - "Network Configuration" for more infor-
mation.)
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 1-4 Ethernet Switch
-8Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
6. Connect the tielines from unit 1 to unit 2 using the Ethernet cables provided in the kit.
Connect Port 5 of unit 1 to Port 5 of unit 2. Connect Port 6 of unit 1 to Port 6 of unit 2.
7. If VoIP will be used connect Port 4 on each unit to the VoIP network. NOTE: The VoIP
network must be physically separate from the OAM&P network.
8. Connect one T1 cable to the 37 pin connector on unit 1, Figure 1-5 - "DS1 Connector".
Reference Table 1-2 - "T1 Pin Out Table for 600632 Rev A" when wiring to the
APmax with T1 cable part number 600632 Rev A or, if using T1 cable part number
600632 Rev A0 or 600634 Rev A0, then reference Table 1-3 - "T1 Pin Out Table for
600632/600634 Revs A0 and A1". Repeat, connecting another T1 cable to unit 2. Con-
necting one T1 cable to each unit and configuring them appropriately will ensure redundancy.
Figure 1-5 DS1 Connector
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Table 1-2 T1 Pin Out Table for 600632 Rev A
DS1 PIN WIRE COLOR SIGNAL NAME
34
35
15
16
37
36
18
17
14
13
32
31
29
DSI-1
DS1-1
DS1-1
DS1-1
DS1-2
DS1-2
DS1-2
DS1-2
DS1-3
DS1-3
DS1-3
DS1-3
DS1-4
ORG/WHT
BLU/WHT
WHT/ORG
WHT/BLU
BRN/WHT
GRN/WHT
WHT/BRN
WHT/GRN
BLU/RED
SLT/WHT
RED/BLU
WHT/SLT
GRN/RED
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE -TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - TIP
-9Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
DS1-6
DS1-6
DS1-6
DS1-7
DS1-7
DS1-7
DS1-7
DS1-8
DS1-4
DS1-4
DS1-4
DS1-5
DS1-5
DS1-5
DS1-5
DS1-6
-
-
-
-
DS1-8
DS1-8
DS1-8
-
4
23
22
2
7
25
26
5
8
6
27
9
30
11
12
28
10
19
24
33
3
20
21
1
BLU/BLK
BLK/ORG
BLK/BLU
BRN/BLK
GRN/BLK
BLK/BRN
BLK/GRN
BLU/YEL
ORG/RED
RED/GRN
RED/ORG
SLT/RED
BRN/RED
RED/SLT
RED/BRN
ORG/BLK
SLT/BLK
YEL/BLU
BLK/SLT
DRAIN
JUMPER
JUMPER
JUMPER
JUMPER
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
CHASSIS - GROUND
CHASSIS - GROUND
CHASSIS - GROUND
CHASSIS - GROUND
CHASSIS - GROUND
Table 1-3 T1 Pin Out Table for 600632/600634 Revs A0 and A1
DS1
DSI-1
DS1-1
DS1-1
DS1-1
Cable
1
2
1
2
PIN
37
36
18
17
WIRE COLOR
BLU/WHT
BLU/WHT
WHT/BLU
WHT/BLU
SIGNAL NAME
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-10Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
-
-
-
-
DS1-8
DS1-8
DS1-8
DS1-8
DS1-6
DS1-6
DS1-6
DS1-6
DS1-7
DS1-7
DS1-7
DS1-7
DS1-4
DS1-4
DS1-4
DS1-4
DS1-5
DS1-5
DS1-5
DS1-5
DS1-2
DS1-2
DS1-2
DS1-2
DS1-3
DS1-3
DS1-3
DS1-3
2
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
1
10
19
24
20
21
2
3
23
22
5
4
25
26
6
7
9
8
28
27
29
30
11
12
14
13
32
31
34
35
15
16
RED/GRN
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
GRN/RED
DRAIN
JUMPER
DRAIN
JUMPER
RED/BLU
RED/BLU
BLU/RED
BLU/RED
RED/ORG
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
ORG/RED
ORG/WHT
ORG/WHT
WHT/ORG
WHT/ORG
WHT/GRN
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
GRN/WHT
BRN/WHT
BRN/WHT
WHT/BRN
WHT/BRN
SLT/WHT
SLT/WHT
WHT/SLT
WHT/SLT
-11-
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
CHASSIS - GROUND
CHASSIS - GROUND
CHASSIS - GROUND
CHASSIS - GROUND
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE -TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - RING
TRANSMIT - RING
RECEIVE - TIP
TRANSMIT - TIP
Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
-
Chapter 1 - Hardware Installation
CHASSIS - GROUND 33 JUMPER
9. Apply power to the APmax system.
10. Go to Chapter 2 - "Installing the APmax UI" and follow the steps to install the software
on the PC.
11. Go to Section 3.4 - "APmax System Administration" and follow the instructions to add
the APmax to the UI.
12. Go to Chapter 5 - "System Time Manager" and set the time in the APmax. The time
must be set for the system to complete boot up. Allow 5 minutes for boot up.
13. Go to Chapter 4 - "Network Configuration" and follow the instructions to configure the
ethernet interfaces on the APmax.
14. Go to Chapter 7 - "Digital Carrier Configuration" and configure the DS1s on the
APmax.
15. Hardware Installation is complete.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-12Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
2.1 Installation Procedure
NOTES:
• Before you begin the APmax UI (User Interface) software installation, it is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs and disable any anti-virus software for the duration of the installation. Otherwise, the APmax UI installation may fail.
• The full APmax UI software package consists of one CD-ROM disc and requires one of the following operating systems: Windows® 7 Professional, Windows® 7 Enterprise, Windows® 7 Ultimate, Windows® 8 Pro, or Windows® 8 Enterprise.
This section contains step-by-step instructions for new installations of APmax UI on a single computer. Instructions for upgrading an existing installation of the APmax UI can be found in
Section 2.2 - "Upgrade Procedure".
Install APmax User Interface:
1. Locate the APmax UI installation CD.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD contains an Autorun file, which will automatically initiate the APmax UI installation procedure when the CD is inserted into the CD-ROM drive. To ensure that the Autorun file is activated, you should be logged into Windows before you insert the CD.
If you already have the CD inserted in your CD-ROM drive, or the Autorun feature does not activate, press the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen and select the Run command. A dialog box will appear. Enter the following path in the dialog box and click the OK button to begin loading the software onto the PC.
<CD drive letter>:\APmax\setup.exe
3. The APmax UI has been developed using Microsoft .NET technology and therefore the
.NET Framework version 4.5 must be installed on the computer. If the appropriate runtime environment is not available on the computer, then a prompt to install the correct
.NET Framework (see Figure 2-1) will be displayed. If the correct .NET Framework is
next step in this procedure.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-13Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-1 .NET Framework Requirement Screen
If the prompt to install the .NET Framework is displayed (see Figure 2-1), then press the
Install button. The APmax UI will begin downloading the .NET Framework install file if
the necessary files are not already downloaded. A progress screen similar to Figure 2-2
will be displayed while the file is being downloaded.
Figure 2-2 .NET Framework Downloading Screen
After the file is downloaded, the setup program will automatically begin unpacking the
downloaded file and will load the installation components, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-14Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-3 .NET Framework Installing Screen
Once the installation components are loaded, a screen with the .NET Framework license
terms may be shown (see Figure 2-4), depending on which version of the .NET Frame-
work is currently installed. Complete the instructions in the screen and press the Install button to continue the installation.
Figure 2-4 .NET Framework License Terms
Wait while the .NET Framework is configured and installed in the appropriate locations on the computer. The status of the configuration and installation will be illustrated by the
Download and Install Progress screen (Figure 2-5).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-15Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-5 .NET Framework Install Progress Screen
When the .NET Framework installation is complete, the screen in Figure 2-6 will be dis-
played. Press the Exit button to close this screen and continue to the next step.
Figure 2-6 .NET Framework Setup Complete
4. The APmax UI installation Welcome screen (see Figure 2-7) is shown once the setup pro-
gram verifies the required runtime environments are loaded on the PC.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-16Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-7 APmax UI Installation Welcome Screen
Press the Next button when you are ready to begin the APmax UI installation.
5. The Customer Information screen will now be displayed. This screen is shown in Figure
Figure 2-8 Enter Customer Information
Enter your user name and organization name, select the scope of users who should be allowed to use the APmax UI software on this computer, and then click the Next button to continue the installation.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-17Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
6. The Setup Type screen will now be displayed. Your choices will be Complete and Custom. The Complete installation will install everything. The Custom installation will let
you choose which components to install. This screen is displayed in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 Choose the Setup Type
Select either Complete or Custom and click the Next button to continue the installation.
7. The next window will give you the option of reviewing or changing your installation set-
tings before the installation begins. This is illustrated in Figure 2-10. Press the Install
button to confirm the installation.
Figure 2-10 Ready to Install Screen
8. The installation will now copy the program files to the appropriate locations on the target computer. The status of the installation will be illustrated by the progress bar displayed in
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-18Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-11 Installation Progress Screen
9. Now that the APmax UI and .NET Framework installations are complete, the screen in
Figure 2-12 will be displayed. If you wish to automatically start the APmax UI after the
installation procedure is completed, check the Launch APmax box in this screen. Press the
Finish button to close this screen and exit the installation program. At the end of the
installation you may be presented with a screen (see Figure 2-13) prompting you to restart
your PC for the APmax UI configuration to take effect. Make sure that you know the username and password to log back onto the PC after the restart, and then either select Yes to restart now or remember to restart your PC later before starting the APmax UI
application.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 2-12 APmax UI Installation Complete Screen
-19Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-13 Restart Prompt
Once you are back at the Windows desktop, continue to Chapter 3 - "Getting Started" for
instructions on using the APmax UI application.
2.2 Upgrade Procedure
This section contains step-by-step instructions for upgrading an existing installation of the
APmax UI. Instructions for new installations of the APmax UI can be found in Section 2.1 -
Upgrade APmax UI:
1. Locate the APmax UI installation CD that contains the most current version of the APmax
UI application.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD contains an Autorun file, which
will automatically invoke a prompt to upgrade the APmax UI (see Figure 2-14) when the
CD is inserted into the CD-ROM drive. To ensure that the Autorun file is activated, you should be logged into Windows before you insert the CD.
Figure 2-14 APmax UI Upgrade Prompt
If you already have the CD inserted in your CD-ROM drive, or the Autorun feature does not activate, press the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen and select the Run command. A dialog box will appear. Enter the following path in the dialog box and click the OK button to begin loading the software onto the PC.
<CD drive letter>:\APmax\setup.exe
Press the Yes button when you are ready to begin the upgrade process.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-20Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
3. The APmax UI has been developed using Microsoft .NET technology and therefore the
.NET Framework version 4.5 must be installed on the computer. If the appropriate runtime environment is not available on the computer, then a prompt to install the correct
.NET Framework will be displayed (see Figure 2-1). If this prompt is displayed, then fol-
low the instructions below Figure 2-1 in Section 2.1 - "Installation Procedure" to complete
the .NET Framework installation and then continue with this upgrade procedure.
4. The APmax UI setup program will now validate the existing installation and prepare for
the upgrade process. While this is in progress, a screen similar to Figure 2-15 will be dis-
played.
Figure 2-15 Installation Setup Screen
When the installation is ready to begin, the following screen will be displayed. Press the
Next button to continue the installation.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 2-16 Resume Installation Screen
-21Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
5. The installation will now copy the program files to the appropriate locations on the target computer. The status of the installation will be illustrated by the progress bar displayed in
Figure 2-17 Installation Progress Screen
6. When the installation of the new version of the APmax UI is complete, the APmax UI
Installation Complete screen (see Figure 2-18) will be displayed. Press the Finish button
to close this screen and exit the installation program. At the end of the installation you
may be presented with a screen (see Figure 2-19) prompting you to restart your PC for the
APmax UI changes to take effect. Make sure that you know the username and password to log back onto the PC after the restart, and then either select Yes to restart now or
remember to restart your PC later before starting the APmax UI application.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 2-18 Installation Complete Screen
-22Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-19 Restart Prompt
2.3 APmax UI Update
There are three ways the files of an existing APmax UI installation can be updated:
• Install an updated version of the APmax UI installation CD (see Section 2.2).
• Start the APmax UI, which initiates an automatic check for updates. Subsequent update
checks will occur automatically every 24 hours after startup. See Section 2.3.1 - "Automatic
Updates" for more information.
• Manually check for updates from within the APmax UI (see Section 2.3.2 - "On-Demand
Note: The APmax UI must have access to the Internet to update without an installation CD.
2.3.1 Automatic Updates
Upon startup of the APmax UI, the Innovative Systems FTP site is checked for updated APmax
UI files. If one or more updates are found then a prompt to download and install the updated files
will be displayed (see Figure 2-20). The prompt contains a list of the files that will be updated
along with release notes for the new file versions.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-23Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-20 Update(s) Available
Choosing Cancel in the prompt will display a warning message (Figure 2-21), prompting once
again to update the APmax UI.
Figure 2-21 Update Warning
Agreeing to either of the above prompts will display a Downloading and Installing Updates prog-
ress window similar to Figure 2-22. The window will remain open until all updates are down-
loaded and installed, and then it will close, allowing the APmax UI to resume startup.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-24Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-22 Downloading and Installing Updates
If no updates are found when the APmax UI is started, or if Cancel is selected in the download
and install prompt (Figure 2-20), then the APmax UI will automatically check for updates every
twenty-four hours after startup. If updates are found during the automatic 24-hour checkup then a
prompt with a 2-hour timer will be displayed (see the Install button in Figure 2-23). The APmax
UI will be restarted and the updates will be installed when the timer reaches zero unless the Can-
cel button is pressed.
Figure 2-23 Restart Prompt
2.3.2 On-Demand Updates
The Innovative Systems FTP site can be checked at any time for updated APmax UI files by
selecting the Help | Check for Updates command in the menu bar, as illustrated in Figure 2-24.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-25Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 2 - Installing the APmax UI
Figure 2-24 Check for Updates Menu Command
If one or more updates are found then a prompt with a 2-hour timer will be displayed (see Figure
2-25). The APmax UI will be restarted and the updates will be installed when the timer reaches
zero unless the Cancel button is pressed. Choosing Install in the prompt will restart the APmax
UI. Upon startup the Downloading and Installing Updates progress window will be shown (see
Figure 2-22). The window will remain open until all updates are downloaded and installed, and
then it will close, allowing the APmax UI to resume startup.
If no updates are found then a No Updates Found message will be displayed (Figure 2-26).
Figure 2-25 Restart Prompt
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 2-26 No Updates Found
-26Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Chapter 3 - Getting Started APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
3.1 Logging Into the APmax UI
At this point, the APmax UI software should be installed. Run the program by clicking on the
Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, selecting Programs, selecting the Innovative
Systems group and clicking on the command. If desired, a shortcut may be placed on the Windows desktop to allow quicker access to the software.
The following figure depicts the login window for the APmax UI software:
Figure 3-1 APmax UI Sign In Window
The first time the software is run, a master Login ID (user name) and password must be used to access the software. The initial login and password is:
Login ID: MASTER
Password: STRT
ÆUse all capital letters.
ÆUse all capital letters.
To login, do the following:
1. Enter the user name in the Login ID field. (Type MASTER if you are running the APmax
UI for the first time.)
2. Enter the Password. (Type STRT if you are running the APmax UI for the first time.)
3. Optionally, a master APmax system may be designated at this time by expanding the
Advanced section (click on the expand symbol) and doing one of the following: a. Select a Master APmax system that has been previously added to the APmax UI and has been designated as a master system.
b. Enter into the Master APmax combobox the IP address of a master system’s Unit 1,
Administration CPU.
See Section 3.4.3 - "Master APmax Management" for information about using a master
APmax.
4. Click on the Sign In button or press the <ENTER> key to complete the login procedure.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-27Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
The MASTER / STRT login ID and password allows user administration functions only. There-
fore, after logging in, access will be given only to the User Administration interface. See Section
3.2 - "User Administration" for detailed information on defining new users with access to more
functions.
3.2 User Administration
The User Administration interface is used to add users, delete users, and define the login ID, password, and access privileges for each user. The access privileges define what APmax UI functions the user will be allowed to access and perform. To access the User Administration interface, right-click on the APmax UI icon
in the Command Center window (see Section 3.3 for
detailed information on using the Command Center window) to invoke a popup menu, and select
Figure 3-2 User Administration Menu Command
Figure 3-3 User Administration Window
A list of currently defined users will be displayed in the User Administration window. If no users have been defined the list will be blank.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-28Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
3.2.1 Adding a User
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
To define a new APmax UI user, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the User Administration window (see Figure 3-3). The User Infor-
mation window (Figure 3-4) will be displayed.
Figure 3-4 User Information Window
2. Populate the following fields in the User Information window:
Login ID
Enter the new user name. The Login ID may consist of up to 30 characters. The case of the characters does not matter. When logging on, the Login ID is not case-sensitive.
Description
Password
Enter a short description of the user to help identify the purpose of the user in the User Administration list. This field is not required.
Enter the user password. The password may consist of up to
30 characters. The case of the characters does matter. When logging on, the Password is case-sensitive.
Confirm Password
Enter the password again.
3. Press the Access Rights button in the User Information window to display the User Access
Rights window (see Figure 3-5). See Section 3.2.4 - "User Access Rights Details" for
detailed information on selecting the appropriate access rights for this user. If there are currently no other users defined in the User Information window, it is recommended that you define an administrator user with access privileges to all functions.
4. Once the access rights have been selected for the new user, press the OK button in the
User Access Rights window to return to the User Information window.
5. Press the OK button in the User Information window. The new user has now been successfully created and will be displayed in the list of users in the User Administration window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-29Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Additional users may be added at this time, or they can be added later by the system administrator
(or anyone else with the access privileges to add new users).
To login with the new user, exit the APmax UI program and login using the Login ID and Pass-
word that you defined for the new user. See Section 3.1 - "Logging Into the APmax UI" for more
information on logging in.
3.2.2 Editing a User
To modify the settings (Login ID, Description, Password, Access Rights) of an existing APmax
UI user, select the user in the User Administration window (see Figure 3-3) and press the Edit but-
ton. A User Information window (see Figure 3-4) populated with the current settings of the
selected user will be displayed. Make any desired changes to the settings and press the OK button in the User Information window to save the changes.
3.2.3 Deleting a User
To delete an APmax UI user, select the user in the User Administration window (see Figure 3-3)
and press the Delete button. A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed. Select the Yes button to complete the deletion.
3.2.4 User Access Rights Details
The User Access Rights window (see Figure 3-5) is used to define what APmax UI functions the
user will be allowed to access and perform. This window is accessed for individual users by
pressing the Access Rights button in the User Information window (Figure 3-4) while adding or
editing a user.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-30Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-5 User Access Rights Window
There are several major categories of functions in the APmax UI. Documentation for these categories is found in the following locations:
• APmax Configuration - See Part 2 - "System Configuration"
• APmax Maintenance - See Part 3 - "System Maintenance"
• APmax Surveillance - See Part 4 - "System Surveillance"
• InnoStream Server Configuration - This category is only applicable if the APmax UI is being used to manage an InnoStream Server. See the InnoStream Server User Manual for more information.
• InnoStream Server Maintenance - This category is only applicable if the APmax UI is being used to manage an InnoStream Server. See the InnoStream Server User Manual for more information.
• InnoStream Server Surveillance - This category is only applicable if the APmax UI is being used to manage an InnoStream Server. See the InnoStream Server User Manual for more information.
• Service Provisioning - See Part 5 - "Services"
• APmax UI - See sub-sections in Chapter 3 - "Getting Started"
• GIS - This category is only applicable if the Innovative Systems GIS (Geographic Information System) application is installed on the computer running the APmax UI software. See the Innovative Systems GIS support documentation for more information.
These categories and the functions in each category are shown in a tree structure in the User
Access Rights window. Branch items in the tree (items that have sub-items) are indicated by a symbol. Clicking on this symbol alternately expands and contracts the sub-item list.
Each APmax UI category and function in the tree will have one of the following graphic symbols indicating the user access status for that function.
• indicates the user does not have read or write access to the associated function.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-31Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
• indicates the user has read-only access to the function.
• indicates the user has read and write access to the function.
Below the tree of functions are the Read and Write boxes. Selecting a function and checking the
Read box will enable read access to that function. Similarily, checking the Write box will enable write access to the function. Unchecking either box will disable the associated type of access to the selected function. Alternatively, you may right-click on a function to invoke a popup menu
(see Figure 3-6) and select the command you wish to perform.
Figure 3-6 User Access Rights Popup Menu
To quickly set access rights to all sub-items in a category, click on the category (e.g., System Configuration) in the tree and enable or disable read or write access using the same methods described
above for individual functions. A prompt (see Figure 3-7) will be displayed, asking if you would
like to apply the rights change to all services beneath the selected node. Choose Yes to confirm applying the change to the sub-items or No to decline it.
Figure 3-7 Apply Rights Prompt
3.3 The Command Center
The purpose of this section is to familiarize you with the APmax UI Command Center and to provide basic instructions for using the APmax UI (User Interface) for the first time.
• Section 3.3.1 - "Command Center Overview"
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-32Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
• Section 3.3.2 - "Command Center Items & Commands"
• Section 3.3.3 - "Menu Bar Commands"
• Section 3.3.4 - "User Preferences"
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
3.3.1 Command Center Overview
The Command Center window is intended to provide a visual representation of the APmax UI and the systems it administers. The Command Center window is automatically displayed when the
APmax UI is started. The following figure depicts an example of the APmax UI Command Center window after APmax systems have been defined. Initially, the only icon in the Command
Center window will be the APmax UI icon. See Section 3.4.2.1 - "Adding a System" for more
information on defining new systems.
Figure 3-8 APmax UI Command Center
The Command Center window can be sized and positioned just like any other Windows display.
In addition, the icons within the Command Center window can be independently positioned. To move an icon in the Command Center:
1. Move the mouse cursor onto the item to be moved.
2. Press down and hold down the left-hand mouse button.
3. Drag the item to a new position by moving the mouse in the desired direction.
4. When the item is in the desired position, release the left-hand mouse button.
The Command Center window will retain its last size between APmax UI sessions. Also, the items within the Command Center window will maintain their position between APmax UI sessions.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-33Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
3.3.2 Command Center Items & Commands
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Icons in the Command Center window will display a popup menu when the right-hand mouse button is clicked while the mouse pointer is positioned over the icon. The popup menu will contain commands specific to the selected icon. The items found in the Command Center and all of their associated commands are described below:
APmax UI Icon
- This icon represents APmax UI administration. From this icon you can access commands that affect the configuration of the APmax UI itself (e.g., change user preferences) and define APmax systems. The available commands are listed below.
APmax System Definition - See Section 3.4 - "APmax System Administration"
Subscriber System Map - See Section 3.5 - "Subscriber System Map"
User Administration - See Section 3.2 - "User Administration"
User Preferences - See Section 3.3.4 - "User Preferences"
System Icon
- This icon represents an APmax system being managed by the APmax
UI. There will be one of these icons for each system that has been defined in the APmax UI (see
Section 3.4.2.1 - "Adding a System"). The name of the system will be shown in the label below
the system icon. Right-clicking on the system icon will allow you to access the commands used to configure the system.
If an alarm is present on an APmax system, then the system’s icon will have an alarm symbol
in the upper left-hand corner of the icon. For more information on alarms, see Chapter 19 -
"Alarm Status". If an error occurs that causes the APmax UI to be disconnected from the system,
then a disconnect symbol will be shown in the upper left-hand corner of the system icon. Hovering the mouse pointer over either of these symbols will display a tooltip with information about the alarm or error.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-34Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Elation Messenger Configuration - Section 4.3
Internet Access Settings - Chapter 11
Network Configuration
Ethernet Configuration - Section 4.1
VLAN Configuration - Section 4.2
Phone Number Format - Chapter 12
Serial Configuration - Chapter 6
Service Configuration - Section 8.7
System Time Manager - Chapter 5
Trunks
Digital Carrier Configuration - Chapter 7
Trunk Configuration - Chapter 9
Announcement Manager - Chapter 14
FTP Transfer Service - Chapter 15
Package Management - Chapter 16
System Upgrade Manager - Chapter 18
Digital Carrier Status - Chapter 20
Ethernet Switch Information - Chapter 21
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-35Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Services Icon
- This icon represents the licensing and system-wide service data (e.g.,
Voice Mail Administration) of all APmax systems being administered by the APmax UI. Systemspecific service settings are found in the menus under the appropriate system icon . The menu options listed below are found under the Services icon in all installations of the APmax UI.
Additional menu options may be displayed as other services are installed on APmax systems. The interfaces for additional services are not discussed in the APmax User Manual. Documentation
for each additional service (e.g., APmax Voice Mail) is packaged with that service. See Part 5 -
"Services" for more information about APmax services.
License Viewer - See Chapter 25
Subscriber Management - See Chapter 26
Note: The availability of the Subscriber Management menu command depends on the
APmax UI Preferences (see Section 3.3.4).
Quick Launch Bar
- The Quick Launch bar is located on the right-hand
side of the APmax UI window (see Figure 3-8). It tracks the most frequently used interfaces and
displays the icons that represent the interfaces. Users can start the programs listed in the Quick
Launch bar with a single left-click on the appropriate icon. Right-clicking on an icon will display a popup menu with an Open option that will start the program and a Remove option that will reset the counter for the selected program to zero, effectively removing it from the list until the program is started again. The Quick Launch bar can be turned on or off using the Command History
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-36Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
setting in the User Preferences interface (see Section 3.3.4). All of the counters for the most-used
interfaces can be cleared by pressing the Reset button in the Advanced tab of the User Preferences
interface (see Section 3.3.4.2).
Status Bar
- The status bar is located along the bottom of the APmax UI window and provides information such as the initialization status of add-ons and the current Master Mode of the APmax, which will display “ON” if
a master APmax is being used (see Section 3.4.3 - "Master APmax Management"), or “OFF” if a
master APmax is not being used.
3.3.3 Menu Bar Commands
The menu bar (Figure 3-9) at the top of the APmax UI window contains drop-down menus which
provide access to a variety of functions such as displaying help documentation, managing user preferences, or updating the user interface.
Figure 3-9 APmax UI Menu Bar
The commands found in the menu bar are described below:
File
Menu Command
Save Current
Window
Description
Saves settings in the selected window. Typically settings in the
APmax UI are saved when a window is closed. This command allows settings to be saved without closing the window.
Figure 3-10 File Menu
User Preferences
Opens the APmax UI Preferences
interface described in Section 3.3.4.
Exit
Closes the APmax UI.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-37Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Menu
Window
Command
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Description
Displays a list of windows that are open in the APmax UI. Selecting a window in the list will bring it to the foreground.
Help
Figure 3-11 Window Menu
Figure 3-12 Help Menu
Contents
Check for
Updates
About
Displays the table of contents of the
APmax UI online help documenta-
Checks the Innovative Systems
FTP site for updated APmax UI files and gives a prompt to download and install any updates that are
found. See Section 2.3 - "APmax
UI Update" for more information.
Displays the APmax UI version and also a list of the add-ons that are installed with the APmax UI. See
Online Tech Support
Opens the online technical support page on the Innovative Systems website ( http://www.innovsys.com/ registered/TechSupport.htm
). See
Program Messages
Opens the Program Messages
interface (see Figure 3-17) and dis-
plays a standard file selection window that allows a trace file to be viewed and emailed using the File |
Send menu command.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-38Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Menu
Region
Figure 3-13 Region Menu
Command
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Description
Used to display and change the
active region, as described in Section 3.4.1.4.
Figure 3-14 Online Help Contents
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 3-15 About Window
-39Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-16 Online Technical Support
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 3-17 Program Messages
-40Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
3.3.4 User Preferences
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
The APmax UI Preferences interface allows users to change options that affect the display and usage of the Command Center, and also to configure the Central Reporting Server address. To access the APmax UI Preferences interface, right-click on the APmax UI icon to invoke a
popup menu, and select the User Preferences command (as illustrated in Figure 3-18). The
APmax UI Preferences window (see Figure 3-19) will be displayed.
Figure 3-18 User Preferences Menu Command
Figure 3-19 APmax UI Preferences - General Tab
The APmax UI window is partitioned into three tabs: General, Advanced and Reporting Server.
The General tab is displayed by default when the window is opened. The configuration settings available in each of these tabs are described in the following sections.
• Section 3.3.4.1 - "General Settings"
• Section 3.3.4.2 - "Advanced Settings"
• Section 3.3.4.3 - "Reporting Server Settings"
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-41Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
3.3.4.1 General Settings
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
The General tab (Figure 3-19) in the APmax UI Preferences window contains the following set-
tings:
Quick Launch
Select whether or not the Quick Launch bar will be displayed. The
Quick Launch bar displays the most frequenty used menu commands.
Options include:
Display - The Quick Launch bar will be shown docked on the right-hand
side of the APmax UI window (see Figure 3-8). This option is selected
by default.
Hide - The Quick Launch bar will not be displayed.
Subscriber Management
Options include:
Display - The Subscriber Management interface (either as a floating window or docked panel) will be shown in the APmax UI window by default. This option is selected by default.
Hide - The Subscriber Management interface will not be automatically displayed when the APmax UI is started, but can be accessed by rightclicking on the Services icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and then selecting the Subscriber | Management
command (as illustrated in Figure 3-20).
Figure 3-20 Subscriber Management Menu Command
Changes to this setting will not take effect until the APmax UI is restarted.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-42Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Subscriber Management Location
Choose how the Subscriber Management interface (see Section 26.1)
will be displayed in the APmax UI window. Options include:
Docked - The Subscriber Management panel will be docked to the bottom of the APmax UI window.
Floating - The Subscriber Management interface will be displayed as a free-standing window and may be resized, closed, and opened (using
the menu command described above Figure 3-20). This option is
selected by default.
Maximized - The Subscriber Management interface will fill the entire
APmax UI window by default when the APmax UI is started.
Changes to this setting will not take effect until the APmax UI is restarted.
After selecting the desired options, press the OK button to save any changes to the APmax UI
Preferences. To exit the APmax UI Preferences window without saving any changes, press the
Cancel button.
3.3.4.2 Advanced Settings
The Advanced tab (Figure 3-21) in the APmax UI Preferences window contains the following
functions.
Figure 3-21 APmax UI Preferences - Advanced Tab
APmax Addon
Cache
The purpose of the addon cache is to decrease the startup time of the
APmax UI. Over time, new services and service upgrades may increase the startup time. Clearing the addon cache by pressing the Clear button will force the cache to be recreated the next time the APmax UI is started, which will result in decreased startup times in the future.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-43Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Quick Launch
The Quick Launch bar (described in Section 3.3.2 - "Command Center Items
& Commands") tracks the most frequently used interfaces in the APmax UI.
Pressing the Reset button in the Advanced tab of the APmax UI Preferences window will clear the contents of the Quick Launch bar and reset all of the interface counters to zero.
3.3.4.3 Reporting Server Settings
The Reporting Server tab (Figure 3-22) in the APmax UI Preferences window contains the fol-
lowing functions.
Address
Figure 3-22 APmax UI Preferences - Reporting Server Tab
This optional field is used to set the address of a server that will be used as a common database repository for the APmax system. This allows APmax UI
features such as Report Viewer (see Chapter 17) to retrieve APmax data-
base records from a server other than the APmax system. For more information about this feature, see the Central Reporting Server Service Description document.
The Reporting Server Address consists of the IP address or DNS name of the server, followed by a colon and port number (e.g. apmaxservices:7219).
After entering a server address, press the OK button. The APmax UI will attempt to connect to the entered address. If the connection fails then an error message will be displayed and the new address will not be saved. To exit the APmax UI Preferences window without saving any changes, press the Cancel button.
Note: If a Master APmax (see Section 3.4.3) is set then this address setting
will be shared with other APmax UI installations that have the same Master
APmax.
Version
The version of APmax Central Reporting Server software that this APmax UI is connected to.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-44Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
3.4 APmax System Administration
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
This section explains the concepts of System Regions (Section 3.4.1), Master APmax Mode (Sec-
tion 3.4.3), and Single Web Portal (Section 3.4.4). It also contains instructions for adding (Sec-
tion 3.4.2.1), editing (Section 3.4.2.2), and deleting (Section 3.4.2.3) systems within the APmax
UI. The interface for performing these functions is the APmax System Administration window
To access the APmax System Administration window, right-click on the APmax UI icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the APmax System Definition
command (as illustrated in Figure 3-23). A window similar to Figure 3-24 will be displayed.
Figure 3-23 APmax System Definition Menu Command
Figure 3-24 APmax System Administration Window
The APmax System Administration window is partitioned into two tabs: Defined APmax’s and
Master APmax Setup.
The Defined APmax’s tab has two sections: System Regions (see Section 3.4.1) and System List
(see Section 3.4.2). The System Regions section contains a list of the regions that have been
defined within this installation of the APmax UI. The System List section contains a list of all the systems that have been defined for the region currently selected in the System Regions section.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-45Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
3.4.1 System Regions
The System Regions feature allows APmax systems to be partitioned into regions. This feature is intended to help with the management of a large number of APmax systems in a single APmax UI installation and is not necessary when managing a small number of systems in the APmax UI.
System regions are defined in the left pane of the Defined APmax’s tab in the APmax System
Administration window. If no system regions have been defined, then the only item in the left
pane will be the <Default Region> system region (see Figure 3-25). An example of this window
with multiple regions defined can be seen in Figure 3-24.
Figure 3-25 Default System Regions List
mand Center.
3.4.1.1 Adding a System Region
To create a new system region, press the Add button below the System Regions section in the
APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-25). An Add Region window will be dis-
played (see Figure 3-26). Enter the name of the new region and press the OK button. APmax sys-
tems can now be added to the new region (see Section 3.4.2.1 - "Adding a System").
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-46Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-26 Adding a Region
3.4.1.2 Editing a System Region Name
To change the name of a region, click on the region name and press the Edit button below the Sys-
tem Regions section in the APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-25). An Edit
Region window will be displayed, with the current name of the region highlighted (see Figure 3-
27). Enter the name of the new region and press the OK button to accept the changed name.
Figure 3-27 Editing a Region Name
3.4.1.3 Deleting a System Region
WARNING! Use this command with EXTREME CAUTION. Deleting an APmax system region will NOT affect the configuration on the systems in the region, however, the configuration for ALL systems in the deleted region will not be accessible from the APmax UI until the systems are re-added.
To delete a system region, first click on the region name in the System Regions section of the
APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-24). Note that any systems displayed in
System List section of the window will also be removed from the APmax UI if the selected region is deleted.
Next, press the Delete button below the System Regions section. If there are no systems in the
the No button to cancel the deletion.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-47Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Figure 3-28 Prompt to Delete an Empty Region
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-29 Prompt to Delete a Region with Systems
3.4.1.4 System Regions in the Command Center
When the APmax systems administered by the APmax UI have been partitioned into regions, the following changes will occur in the display of the Command Center window.
• The Regions drop-down box in the menu bar at the top of the APmax UI window will contain a list of regions that have been defined, and the active region will be selected.
• The name of the active region will be displayed in the Command Center window caption.
• The Command Center will only display system icons for the active region.
All of these changes to the display of the Command Center window are illustrated in Figure 3-30
below.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 3-30 Selecting a Region in the Command Center
-48Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
To change the active region, click in the Regions drop-down box to display a list of regions and select the region to activate from the list. The positions of APmax system icons in the Command Center will be preserved when switching from region to region.
3.4.2 System Management
The Defined APmax’s tab in the APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-31) is used
to manage APmax regions and systems. The left-hand pane of the Defined APmax’s tab contains
a list of system regions that have been added to the APmax UI (see Section 3.4.1). Selecting a
system region in the left-hand pane will display in the right-hand pane the systems that have been defined for that region.
The system list has two columns, System Name and System ID. The System Name column contains a short description of each system, and the System ID column contains the unique number assigned to the system. Each item in this list will correspond to a System icon in the
Command Center window with the same name. If no systems have been defined in the selected region, then the contents of both columns will be empty.
Figure 3-31 APmax System Administration Window
The Add, Edit, and Delete buttons located below the system list, and their associated functions, are described in the following sections:
• Add button - Section 3.4.2.1 - "Adding a System"
• Edit button - Section 3.4.2.2 - "Editing a System Name"
• Delete button - Section 3.4.2.3 - "Deleting a System"
3.4.2.1 Adding a System
To add an APmax system to this installation of the APmax UI, follow these steps:
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-49Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
1. Right-click on the APmax UI icon in the Command Center window to invoke a
popup menu, and select the APmax System Definition command (as illustrated in Figure 3-
23). The APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-31) will be displayed.
2. In the left-hand pane of the Defined APmax’s tab, select the region to which the new system should be added.
3. Press the Add button located at the bottom of the System List section of the window and
Figure 3-32 Add Button Menu
Figure 3-33 Adding a System
4. The System Information window contains the following fields:
System ID
A unique number that identifies this system. The number entered here must be the ID assigned to the system hardware on the local network. See your system administrator for help finding this number. (The System ID number should be found on a label on the left side at the rear of the APmax unit).
System Name
Enter the desired name for the system in this field. Each system is typically identified by a site name. This name will be displayed with the associated system icon in the Command
Center window and in the captions of any configuration windows that are associated specifically with this system. This name defaults to the system ID.
If you know the ID of the system you wish to add, then enter it in the System ID field (the
System Name field is optional) and press the OK button. The System Information window will attempt to find the entered System ID on the network. If it is not found a warning will be displayed and the system will not be added.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-50Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Immediately after a system is successfully added, a system icon new system will appear in the Command Center window.
representing the
If you do not know the ID of the system you wish to add, you can use the Find and
Advanced buttons to locate the system. Pressing the Find button while the System ID field is empty will display all of the systems found on the network in the APmax Systems win-
Figure 3-34 Direct Unit Query Window
The Direct Unit Query window allows you to find a system by entering the IP address of the Admin CPU. To do this, fill out the Admin IP Address field, press the Add button, and then press the OK button. The Direct Unit Query window will attempt to find the entered
IP address on the network. If a system is found that matches the entered IP address, it will
be displayed in the APmax Systems window (see Figure 3-35).
Figure 3-35 APmax Systems Window
The APmax Systems window is displayed when systems are found on the network using the Find or Advanced button functions in the System Information window. Systems found using these methods are displayed in a list within the window. To the left of each system row is a tree symbol that can be clicked on to display more details about the system (as
illustrated in Figure 3-35). These details include the Unit Number, Serial Number, Call
Processing CPU IP Address, and Admin CPU IP Address of each unit in the system. If the
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-51Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started system you are trying to add is listed here, select it and press the OK button. You will be returned to the System Information window where the System ID and System Name fields
will be populated with the values from the selected system (similar to Figure 3-36).
Figure 3-36 System Information Window
Press the OK button in the System Information window to finish adding the system.
5. Configure the communications settings for the new system. The APmax UI PC must be connected directly to the system through a Local Area Network using IP-based protocols.
See Chapter 4 - "Network Configuration" for information about configuring communica-
tion settings.
6. Set the time and time zone for the new system. See Chapter 5 - "System Time Manager"
for information about configuring time settings.
3.4.2.2 Editing a System Name
To change the name associated with a system, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on the APmax UI icon in the Command Center window to invoke a
popup menu, and select the APmax System Definition command (as illustrated in Figure 3-
23). The APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-24) will be displayed.
2. In the left-hand pane of the Defined APmax’s tab, select the region of the system you wish to edit.
3. Click on the system you wish to edit in the System List in the right-hand pane of the window, and press the Edit button. A System Information window populated with the current
System ID and System Name values will be displayed (see Figure 3-37).
Figure 3-37 Editing a System
4. Only the name can be edited for existing systems. Enter the new name in the System
Name field and press the OK button to apply the changes to the system, or press the Can-
cel button to exit the window without saving any changes. If the name is changed, the new name will be displayed with the associated system icon in the Command Center window and in the captions of any configuration windows that display the system name.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-52Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
3.4.2.3 Deleting a System
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
WARNING! Use this command with EXTREME CAUTION. Deleting an APmax system will NOT affect the configuration on the APmax system, however, the configuration will not be accessible from the APmax UI.
Follow these steps to delete a APmax system from the APmax UI:
1. Right-click on the APmax UI icon in the Command Center window to invoke a
popup menu, and select the APmax System Definition command (as illustrated in Figure 3-
23). The APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-24) will be displayed.
2. In the left-hand pane of the Defined APmax’s tab, select the region of the system you wish to delete.
3. Click on the system you wish to delete in the System List in the right-hand pane of the window, and press the Delete button located below the System List. A delete confirma-
tion prompt (see Figure 3-38) will be displayed.
Figure 3-38 Delete Confirmation Prompt
4. Press the Yes button to complete the deletion and remove all of the configurations associated with the system from the APmax UI, or press the No button to cancel the deletion.
3.4.3 Master APmax Management
The Master APmax Setup tab in the APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-39) is
used to share APmax UI configuration settings (e.g. regions, users) between multiple APmax UI
installations (see Section 3.4.3.1).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-53Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-39 Master APmax Setup Tab
The APmax UI status bar (Figure 3-40) will display Master Mode: ON if a master APmax is con-
figured, and Master Mode: OFF if a master APmax is not configured.
Figure 3-40 Master Mode in Status Bar
3.4.3.1 Master APmax Setup
Settings are shared between multiple APmax UI installations by designating an APmax system as the “Master APmax” on which APmax UI configuration changes will be saved. If an APmax UI installation is configured with a Master APmax then upon startup it will receive from the Master
APmax any APmax UI configuration changes made with other APmax UI installations that share the same Master APmax.
NOTE: A Master APmax system should only be designated one time (instructions are provided below) on one APmax UI installation. Subsequent APmax UI installations should use the APmax
Sign In screen (Figure 3-41) to choose the Master APmax from which they will get their APmax
UI configuration settings.
Initial Master APmax Setup
When setting up a Master APmax for the first time, go to the Master APmax Setup tab in the
APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-39). The left-hand side of the Master
APmax Setup tab has a list with two columns, System Name and System ID. The System Name column contains a short description of each system defined in the APmax UI, and the System ID column contains the unique number assigned to the system. To assign a system as the Master
APmax, select the system in the list and press the right arrow button. To unassign the Master
APmax system, press the left arrow button next to the Master APmax field.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-54Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Secondary Master APmax Setup
After a Master APmax has been configured, subsequent APmax UI installations that intend to use the data stored on the Master APmax should choose a Master APmax from within the APmax
Sign In screen (Figure 3-41). This is done by expanding the Advanced section (click on the
expand symbol) in the APmax Sign In screen and performing one of the following actions: a. Select a Master APmax system that has been previously added to the APmax UI and has been designated as a master system.
b. Enter into the Master APmax combobox the IP address of a master system’s Unit 1,
Administration CPU.
Figure 3-41 Master APmax Sign In
If the chosen system is a valid Master APmax then the user will be able to login with any user account previously defined in the Master APmax database. More information about logging into
the APmax UI is available in Section 3.1. Section 3.2 - "User Administration" provides instruc-
tions for creating user accounts.
3.4.4 Single Web Portal Setup
The Single Web Portal tab in the APmax System Administration window (see Figure 3-42) is
used to transfer service subscribers from multiple APmax systems to a single APmax system. This allows a single IP address or domain name to be used as the service provider for all of the APmax systems defined in the APmax UI.
WARNINGS: Setting up a Single Web Portal host system will apply to ALL systems defined
in the APmax UI. Also, using Single Web Portal on sites with only one defined APmax system may have unintended consequences.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-55Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-42 Single Web Portal
Follow these steps to setup a Single Web Portal system:
1. Open the Internet Access Settings interface of the APmax system that will be the Single
Web Portal host. See Chapter 11 for information on the Internet Access Settings interface.
2. In the General tab of the Internet Access Settings interface (see Section 11.1), set the
External Address setting to the IP address or domain name that someone on the Internet would use to access this service provider.
3. Close the Internet Access Settings interface.
4. Open the APmax System Administration interface (Section 3.4).
5. Select the Single Web Portal tab.
6. Use the Host System selection box to choose the Single Web Portal host.
7. Press the Send Data button. This will send a message to all APmax systems in the APmax
UI and set their Single Web Portal to the selected Host System. When this step is complete
a confirmation message similar to Figure 3-43 will be displayed.
Figure 3-43 Internet Access Master Set
8. Press the OK button to close the confirmation message (Figure 3-43). This will begin the
process of sending all subscribers on all listed systems to the Single Web Portal host sys-
tem. A progress window similar to Figure 3-44 will be displayed while the subscriber
records are being transferred. The Close button in the Service Record Updates window may be pressed at any time, and if records are still be transferred then a prompt to continue transferring in the background will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-56Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-44 Service Record Update Status
3.5 Subscriber System Map
Note: The Subscriber System Map interface is only used for administering APmax systems with software releases less than version 4.0.
The Subscriber System Map interface is used to define relationships between NPA-NXXs, services, and APmax systems. Service management windows (e.g., Voice Mail Mailbox Management) use this mapping to support “enterprise-wide” service management. Enterprise-wide service management allows the APmax UI user to provision service subscribers without concern for the APmax location of the subscribers. This mapping is how the service management windows determine on which APmax system the service subscribers are located. Users will not be able to add a subscriber to a service if the NPA-NXX of the subscriber is not mapped to that service within the Subscriber System Map window.
To access the Subscriber System Map interface, right-click on the APmax UI icon in the
Command Center window (see Section 3.3 for detailed information on using the Command Cen-
ter window) to invoke a popup menu, and select the Subscriber System Map command (as illus-
trated in Figure 3-45). The Subscriber System Map window (see Figure 3-46) will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-57Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-45 Subscriber System Map Menu Command
Figure 3-46 Subscriber System Map Window
The Subscriber System Map window contains a list of all the NPA-NXX/service/system mappings defined for the APmax systems being administered in the APmax UI. The list has the following four columns:
Mapped Item
The value of the item being mapped to the associated service and system. For example, if the Type is “NPA-NXX” then this value will be a 6-digit NPA-NXX.
Type
Service
The only Type of mapping available at this time is “NPA-NXX.”
The APmax service mapped to this NPA-NXX and system.
System Name
The APmax system mapped to this service and NPA-NXX.
To enter one new item into the Subscriber System Map, press the Add button. A window similar
to Figure 3-47 will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-58Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Figure 3-47 Add New Mapping Window
Enter the 6-digit NPA-NXX you wish to add, select the APmax system being mapped, select the service being mapped, and press the OK button. The new entry will be displayed in the Subscriber System Map window.
Multiple items may be imported from a user-created text file that contains a list of NPA-NXXs, with one NPA-NXX per line. The hyphens in the text file’s NPA-NXXs are optional. To import a text file of NPA-NXXs, click the dropdown arrow on the Add button and select the Import menu
command, as illustrated in Figure 3-48. A standard file selection window will be displayed,
allowing you to choose the text file containing the list of NPA-NXXs.
Figure 3-48 Import Menu Command
Once the text file is chosen, an Add New Mapping List window (see Figure 3-49) will be dis-
played. The fields in the Add New Mapping List window function the same as those described
for the Add New Mapping window (Figure 3-48). Select the APmax system being mapped, select
the service being mapped, and press the OK button. A new entry for each imported NPA-NXX will be displayed in the Subscriber System Map window.
Figure 3-49 Add New Mapping List Window
To delete a Subscriber System Map entry, select the row of the entry you wish to delete and press the Delete button.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-59Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-60Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Part 2 - System
Configuration
Overview
Part 2 provides instructions for configuring communications, time, and other features for APmax
systems. For information on installing the APmax hardware or APmax UI software, or an over-
view of the APmax UI, see Part 1 - "Introduction to APmax".
The following chapters are found in System Configuration:
• Chapter 4 - "Network Configuration"
• Chapter 5 - "System Time Manager"
• Chapter 6 - "Serial Configuration"
• Chapter 7 - "Digital Carrier Configuration"
• Chapter 8 - "SS7 Configuration"
• Chapter 9 - "Trunk Configuration"
• Chapter 10 - "SIP Registration"
• Chapter 11 - "Internet Access Settings"
• Chapter 12 - "Phone Number Format"
To access the configuration interfaces for an APmax system, right-click on the system’s icon
in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu. Select the System Configura-
tion command to expand the popup menu, as illustrated in the figure below. The expanded menu will display all of the available configuration interfaces for this system. Select a command from the expanded menu to display the associated interface.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-61Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
System Configuration Menu
NOTE: The name of the APmax system being configured will be displayed in the caption of any window that is opened using the System Configuration command. If the system name that is displayed in the caption is not the system you want to configure, then close the window and right-click on the icon of the system you want to configure.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-62Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
When a new system is defined in the APmax UI (see Section 3.4.2.1 - "Adding a System"), it is
necessary to establish a direct connection from the PC running the APmax UI software to the
APmax hardware through a Local Area Network (LAN) using IP-based protocols. Communication with the new system must be established before any other features associated with the new system can be configured.
The diagram in Figure 4-1 illustrates a configuration where the APmax hardware has communica-
tion established with the APmax UI and the Internet.
Figure 4-1 Connecting the APmax to the Internet
Firewall Rules
The inbound and outbound port rules that should be enforced by the network to which the APmax connects are as follows:
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-63Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Inbound Ports to Admin or LAN
Interface of CPU2: UDP
53
UDP
123
(DNS)
(NTP)
UDP
5060 (SIP)
UDP
25015 (APmax UI Auto-Discovery)
UDP
25021 (APmax TimeSync)
UDP
32567 (Call Logging Portal)
TCP
20
TCP
21
(APmax UI)
(APmax UI)
TCP
80
TCP
443
TCP
943
TCP
4530
(APmax UI, Web Portal)
(APmax UI, Web Portal)
(APmax UI, Web Portal)
(APmax UI, Web Portal)
TCP
48256 (APmax UI)
TCP
57301 (APmax UI)
Inbound Ports to Internet
Interface of CPU2: UDP
53
UDP
123
TCP
80
TCP
443
(DNS)
(NTP)
(APmax UI, Web Portal)
(APmax UI, Web Portal)
TCP
943
TCP
4530
(APmax UI, Web Portal)
(APmax UI, Web Portal)
TCP
48256 (APmax UI)
Outbound Ports:
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
UDP
123
TCP
20
TCP
21
TCP
23
TCP
25
TCP
80
TCP
443
-64-
(NTP)
(FTP for APmax Packages, see note below)
(FTP for APmax Packages, see note below)
(Telnet - Switch Interface)
(Email)
(Various APmax Services)
(Voice Transcription, etc.)
Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Note: The APmax has the ability to download newer versions of package files (see
Chapter 16 - "Package Management") from the Innovative Systems FTP site. This
feature requires an FTP-aware firewall, or a firewall that allows all outbound connections, as FTP uses one known and one random port per connection. Passive
FTP is used so both connections are outbound from the APmax. This requires TCP ports 20 and 21 to be open into the APmax for “Pre-staged Packages” to function.
The configuration interfaces for APmax system communications are described in the following sections.
• Section 4.1 - "Ethernet Configuration"
• Section 4.2 - "VLAN Configuration"
• Section 4.3 - "Elation Messenger Configuration"
• Section 4.4 - "Test DSP Access"
4.1 Ethernet Configuration
To configure communications for an APmax system, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Configuration | Net-
work Configuration | Ethernet Configuration command (as illustrated in Figure 4-2). The Ether-
net Configuration window (Figure 4-3) will be displayed. The name of the system for which you
are configuring communications will be displayed at the top of the Ethernet Configuration window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 4-2 Ethernet Configuration Menu Command
-65Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
If this is the first time communications have been configured for this system, it is recommended
that you use the Ethernet Configuration Wizard described in Section 4.1.2. The Ethernet Config-
uration Wizard can be accessed by pressing the Wizard button at the bottom of the Ethernet Configuration window.
4.1.1 Ethernet Configuration Interface
The Ethernet Configuration window is partitioned into five tabs: General, DSP, VRRP, Static
Routes, and Tie Line. The General tab is displayed by default when the Ethernet Configuration interface is opened. The configuration settings available in each of these tabs are described in the following sections.
4.1.1.1 General Settings
The General tab (Figure 4-3) allows viewing and editing of the primary Ethernet configuration
settings. The settings in this tab are described below.
Figure 4-3 Ethernet Configuration Window - General Settings
The General tab contains the following fields:
Host Name
The local host name of the system.
Domain Search
A space-separated list of domains to use during DNS lookups when no domain is specified.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-66Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Name Server (DNS)
Address
IP address of the Name Server (DNS) that should be used by this system. There are two Name Server (DNS) Address fields. The second field is optional and will be queried after the address in the first Name Server (DNS) field is queried.
The values of these fields can be any valid IP address in dotted notation (i.e. 172.23.8.5).
The columns and cells in the General tab grid are described in the table below. Click in each cell and enter the appropriate IP address.
Address
Table 1: Ethernet General Settings
Internet
The WAN IP address for the selected network interface.
The WAN IP address can be any valid IP address in dotted notation (i.e. 192.168.5.100).
Administration
The IP address for the Administration CPU network interface. (In a multiunit system, if
Unit 1’s Administration
Address is being used as the
NTP server for the additional units, then any changes to Unit
1’s Administration Address must also be reflected in the
NTP server settings for those
for more information.)
Call Processing
The IP address for the
Call Processing CPU network interface.
Subnet
The subnet mask for the selected network interface.
The subnet mask is used to determine what IP addresses are on the same local network as this system interface. The
Subnet can be any valid subnet mask in dotted notation
(i.e. 255.255.255.0).
The subnet mask for the
Administration CPU network interface.
The subnet mask for the Call Processing
CPU network interface.
Gateway
The IP address of the gateway to be used by this system. The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a destination that is not on the local network. The Gateway can be any valid IP address in dotted notation (i.e. 192.168.5.2).
The IP address of the gateway to be used by the Administration CPU network interface.
The IP address of the gateway to be used by the Call Processing
CPU network interface.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-67Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
4.1.1.2 DSP Settings
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Figure 4-4 DSP Settings
The fields in the DSP grid are described in the table below. Click in each cell and enter the appropriate IP address.
Address
Table 2: Ethernet DSP Settings
DSP 1 - 4
The IP addresses for DSPs 1 through 4 on the selected APmax unit.
The IP address can be any valid IP address in dotted notation (i.e.
172.23.11.79). Changing a DSP IP address will require the associated unit to be restarted for the change to take effect.
Subnet
The subnet mask for the selected network interface. The subnet mask is used to determine what IP addresses are on the same local network as this system interface. The Subnet can be any valid subnet mask in dotted notation (i.e. 255.255.248.0).
Gateway
The IP address of the gateway to be used by this DSP. The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a destination that is not on the local network. The Gateway can be any valid
IP address in dotted notation (i.e. 172.23.8.1) and does not need to be in the same subnet as the DSP’s IP address.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-68Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
4.1.1.3 VRRP Settings
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) is designed to increase the reliability of the default
gateway services. The VRRP tab (Figure 4-5) allows VRRP addresses to be specified for the
WAN subnetwork, Administration CPU network interface, and Call Processing CPU network interface.
Figure 4-5 VRRP Settings
The fields in the VRRP grid are described in the table below. Click in each cell and enter the appropriate IP address.
Address
Table 3: Ethernet VRRP Settings
Internet
The VRRP address for the system’s
WAN interface. It can be any valid
IP address in dotted notation (i.e.
192.168.5.236).
Administration
The VRRP address for the Administration CPU network interface.
Call Processing
The VRRP address for the Call Processing
CPU network interface.
Subnet
The subnet mask for the WAN interface. The subnet mask is used to determine what IP addresses are on the same local network as this system interface. The Subnet can be any valid subnet mask in dotted notation (i.e. 255.255.255.0).
The subnet mask for the
Administration CPU network interface.
The subnet mask for the Call Processing
CPU network interface.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-69Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Gateway
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Table 3: Ethernet VRRP Settings
Internet
The IP address of the gateway to be used by this system. The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a destination that is not on the local network. The Gateway can be any valid IP address in dotted notation
(i.e. 192.168.5.2).
Administration
The IP address of the gateway to be used by the Administration CPU network interface.
Call Processing
The IP address of the gateway to be used by the Call Processing
CPU network interface.
4.1.1.4 Static Routes
subnet, without going to the default route (or gateway). This is useful when it is necessary to map
IP addresses to go out of a specific Ethernet interface and not go to the gateway device. Normally, when a device has to send a message to an address that is not in its subnet, it looks to see if there is a route specified for that address. If a route has not been specified, it sends the message to the gateway for handling. If there is a static route specified, then the device sends the message out on the Ethernet interface specified by the route.
Figure 4-6 Static Routes Tab
Static routes can be configured for the APmax system by pressing the Add button located at the
bottom of the Static Routes tab, filling out the settings in the Add Static Route window (see Figure
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-70Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Figure 4-7 Add Static Route
Unit
Table 4: Static Route Settings
DSP 1 - 4
Select which units on the currently selected APmax system will be configured with the new static route.
Interface
IP Address
The IP address of the static route. The IP address must be in dotted notation (i.e. 172.23.11.79) and must be in the subnet.
Subnet
Select the network interface from which the static route originates.
Options include: Call Processing, Administration, All DSPs, DSP 1,
DSP 2, DSP 3, and DSP 4.
Gateway
The subnet mask for the selected network interface. The Subnet can be any valid subnet mask in dotted notation (i.e. 255.255.248.0).
The IP address of the gateway to be used by this static route. The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a destination that is not on the local network. The Gateway can be any valid IP address in dotted notation (i.e. 172.23.8.1) and does not need to be in the same subnet as the IP address.
Description
A short description used to identify the static route.
To delete a static route from this APmax system, select the route in the list and press the Delete button located at the bottom of the Static Routes tab.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-71Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
4.1.1.5 Tie Line Configuration
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Tie lines are used to maintain redundancy between APmax units. The Tie Line tab (Figure 4-8) in
the Ethernet Configuration window is used to designate two Ethernet switch ports to be tie lines.
One of the designated ports is also allowed to be shared, meaning the tie line can connect to an external switch rather than a cable connecting two ports on the back of the APmax hardware.
WARNING:
Read the entire contents of Section 4.1.1.5 - "Tie Line Configuration" before making
changes to the default tie line switch ports. In a default APmax configuration, port 5 of the first unit will be connected to port 5 of the second unit, and port 6 of the first unit will be connected to port 6 of the second unit. This interface should not be used except under the direction of vendor technical support personnel or a vendor-documented procedure. Any mistakes made using this interface could have serious ramifications.
Any external switch port can be designated as a shared tie line except for port 2, which is the
WAN port for the Administration CPU. Ports 1, 3 and 4 must be shared if they are used as a tie line, so that they will remain available for their original purposes (OAM&P, IPTV, SIP). Ports 5 and 6 are the default tie line ports and should remain so unless special circumstances require one to be used for other purposes. Only one port is allowed to be shared at a time, so one of the two tie line ports must be port 5 or port 6.
Tie line configuration changes will not take effect until the Call Processing CPU and Administration CPU on each APmax unit has been restarted.
Figure 4-8 Tie Line Tab
To change a tie line port, click in a cell in the Eth Switch Port column and select the new port from the drop-down list. If a tie line port is to be shared, then click in the Is Shared cell for the port and change the status to Yes.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-72Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
4.1.2 Ethernet Configuration Wizard
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
The Ethernet Configuration Wizard (see Figure 4-9) is a series of screens that provide step-by-
step configuration of communications for the selected APmax system. This interface is accessed by pressing the Wizard button at the bottom of the Ethernet Configuration window. To advance to the next screen, select the Next button. To go back a screen and make changes, use the Back button. The wizard may be exited at any time by pressing the Cancel button at the bottom of the screen.
1. The first screen (Figure 4-9) of the Ethernet Configuration Wizard contains settings
related to the Internet subnetwork. As with other screens in the wizard, the Internet settings screen contains a list of units found in the selected APmax system. The WAN IP address for each unit can be changed by clicking in the Address cell next to the unit’s row and entering a valid IP address in dotted notation (i.e. 192.168.5.100).
Figure 4-9 Internet Settings Screen
Below the list of units are the following fields:
Subnet
Enter the subnet mask for the selected network interface.
The subnet mask is used to determine what IP addresses are on the same local network as this system interface. The
Subnet can be any valid subnet mask in dotted notation (i.e.
255.255.255.0).
Gateway
Enter the IP address of the gateway to be used by this system. The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a destination that is not on the local network. The Gateway can be any valid IP address in dotted notation (i.e. 192.168.5.2).
VRRP
The VRRP address for the system’s WAN interface.
Press the Next button to advance to the next screen in the wizard.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-73Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
2. The second screen (Figure 4-10) of the Ethernet Configuration Wizard contains settings
pertaining to the APmax’s Administration CPU network interface.
Figure 4-10 Administration Settings Screen
The Address, Subnet, Gateway, and VRRP fields in the screen above provide the same function for the Administration CPU network as the fields in Step 1 provide for the Internet subnetwork. Enter IP address values into the fields and press the Next button to continue.
3. The third screen (Figure 4-11) of the Ethernet Configuration Wizard contains settings per-
taining to the APmax’s Call Processing CPU network interface.
Figure 4-11 Call Processing Settings Screen
The Address, Subnet, Gateway, and VRRP fields in the screen above provide the same function for the Administration CPU network as the fields in Step 1 provide for the Internet subnetwork. Enter IP address values into the fields and press the Next button to continue.
4. The fourth screen (Figure 4-12) of the Ethernet Configuration Wizard contains settings
pertaining to the APmax’s DSP network.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-74Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Figure 4-12 DSP Settings Screen
As with previous screens in the wizard, the DSP settings screen has a list that contains a row for each unit in the APmax system. Next to the Unit number for each row are four cells representing the four DSPs on that unit. Enter the IP addresses for DSPs 1 through 4 for each unit and press the Next button to go to the final screen of the wizard. Once the
Next button is pressed you cannot return to this screen unless the wizard is started again.
5. Press the OK button in the final screen of the wizard to close the wizard and apply the
entered settings to the tabs in the Ethernet Configuration window (Section 4.1.1). The
Ethernet Configuration window must be closed before all of the entered settings will be applied to the APmax system.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 4-13 Wizard Finished Screen
-75Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
4.2 VLAN Configuration
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Each unit in an APmax system has a 16-port internal Ethernet switch. The Virtual Local Area
Network (VLAN) feature of the APmax allows these Ethernet switch ports to be provisioned into separate VLANs. The VLANs along with the APmax Firewall rules provide a way to control network access to the system and protect the call processing network from network storms and attacks.
WARNING:
This interface should not be used except under the direction of vendor technical support personnel or a vendor-documented procedure. Any mistakes made using this interface could have serious ramifications. VLAN configuration changes will not take effect until the Call Processing CPU and Administration CPU on each APmax unit has been restarted.
To configure VLAN communications for an APmax system, right-click on the system’s icon
in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Config-
uration | Network Configuration | VLAN Configuration command (as illustrated in Figure 4-14).
The VLAN Configuration window (Figure 4-15) will be displayed. The name of the system you
are configuring will be displayed at the top of the VLAN Configuration window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 4-14 VLAN Configuration Menu Command
-76Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Figure 4-15 VLAN Configuration Window
The VLAN Configuration window is divided into two sections: Defined VLANs and Selected Item
Settings. The Defined VLANs section on the left-hand side of the window contains a treeview of all VLANs that are defined on the APmax system. The first three VLANs (DEFAULT, TIELINE, and INTER-CPU) are installed by default and are read-only. Each VLAN node in the Defined
VLANs section can be double-clicked to display and hide the ports that are associated with the
VLAN.
NOTE: When the APmax is configured with VLAN support the Port 3 adaptor is designated to provide IPTV services. By default the APmax assigns IP addresses in the
192.168.100.xxx range which may conflict with other devices on the network. The APmax default IP configuration may need to be changed during the installation process to avoid IP address conflicts.
The Selected Item Settings section on the right-hand side of the VLAN Configuration window is used to view and edit settings for the VLAN or port node currently selected in the Defined VLANs treeview. Settings that cannot be edited will be grayed out.
To define a custom VLAN and configure the routes and ports for the VLAN, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button at the bottom of the Defined VLANs section. The Add VLAN win-
dow (see Figure 4-16) will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-77Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Figure 4-16 Add VLAN Window
2. Enter a name for the new VLAN into the VLAN Description field. Also enter an unused one to four-digit External VLAN ID, and then press the OK button. The new VLAN will be displayed in the Defined VLANs section of the VLAN Configuration window.
3. Click on the new VLAN in the Defined VLANs section to display its settings in the right-
hand side of the window (illustrated in Figure 4-17). The VLAN Description and External
VLAN ID that were used when adding the VLAN can be edited at any time in the General
VLAN Settings section of the window. The VLAN Routes section of the window is used to manage the routes for the selected VLAN.
Figure 4-17 VLAN Settings
4. To add a route to the selected VLAN, press the Add button below the VLAN Routes sec-
tion. The Add VLAN Route window (see Figure 4-18) will be displayed. The APmax
Unit field is used to designate which units in the currently selected APmax system will be configured with the new route. Populate the Route Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields, enter a short description of the route and press the OK button to complete the addition. The new route will be shown in the VLAN Routes section of the VLAN Configuration window. Repeat this step to add additional VLAN routes. Routes can also be deleted by selecting them in the VLAN Routes section and pressing the Delete button below the section.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-78Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Figure 4-18 Add VLAN Route
5. To add a port to the selected VLAN, click the dropdown arrow on the Add button that is located below the Defined VLANs section, and then select the Add Port command from the
Figure 4-19 Add Button Dropdown Menu
Figure 4-20 Add Port to VLAN
Populate the following fields in the Add Port to VLAN window and press the OK button.
APmax Unit
Select which units on the currently selected APmax system will be configured with the new VLAN port.
Port
Select the new port. Options may include ADMIN Eth0,
CPROC Eth1, External Ports 1-6, and DSPs 1-4, depending on which ports have already been configured for this VLAN.
Direction
Select the direction of the new port: In, Out, or 2-way.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-79Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Tag Outbound
Packets
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Should outgoing packets be tagged for the new port? Yes or
No.
Port Description
Enter a short description of the port.
Enable Port Down
Alarm
Should this port set an alarm if the port is down? Yes or No.
This option is available for External Ports 1 and 3-6.
The new port will be shown in the Defined VLANs section beneath the VLAN for which it was configured. Select the port to display its settings in the right-hand side of the VLAN
Configuration window (see Figure 4-21).
If the port is ADMIN Eth0, CPROC Eth1 or a DSP, and Tag Outbound Packets is set to
Yes, then the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields in the Port IP Settings section on the right-hand side of the VLAN Configuration window must be filled out before the new port can be saved. The VRRP Address field in the Port IP Settings section is available only if the port is ADMIN Eth0, and is not required.
If the port is External Port 1-6, or Tag Outbound Packets is set to No, then the fields in the
Port IP Settings section will be disabled. The Enable Port Down Alarm field will only be enabled for External Ports 1 and 3-6.
Repeat this step to add additional VLAN ports. Ports can also be deleted by selecting them in the Defined VLANs section and pressing the Delete button below the section.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 4-21 VLAN Port Settings
-80Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
4.3 Elation Messenger Configuration
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
The Elation Messenger Configuration interface is used to set the address and port that connects the APmax system to eLation, the Innovative Systems OSS product (see http://www.innovsys.com/Products/eLation/eLation.html
). This allows APmax services to add records to the eLation Subscriber Activity Log. The Service Description documents associated with each service will provide more details on eLation interaction with that particular service.
Note: The Elation Messenger Configuration interface is only available for APmax systems with the Elation Messenger package installed.
To access the Elation Messenger Configuration interface, right-click on the system’s icon
in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Config-
uration | Elation Messenger Configuration command (as illustrated in Figure 4-22). The name of
the system you are configuring will be displayed at the top of the Elation Messenger Configura-
Figure 4-22 Elation Messenger Configuration Menu Command
Figure 4-23 Elation Messenger Configuration Window
The Port and Address settings in the Elation Messenger Configuration window are described below. Enter the eLation connection information and close the window to save the settings.
Port
The eLation TCP server port number.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-81Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Address
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
The eLation TCP IP address. Setting this address to 0.0.0.0 will disable the service, stop connection attempt error message output, and clear the connection alarm (the next time it tries to connect).
4.4 Test DSP Access
The Test DSP Access tool is used to initiate a communication test with available DSPs using the
“echo server” command-link message.
To open the Test DSP Access interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command
Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Configuration | Network Configu-
Figure 4-24 Test DSP Access Menu Command
Figure 4-25 Test DSP Access Window
The DSP Echo Server selection box in the Test DSP Access window lists the address and unit
number of each DSP on the selected APmax system. See Section 4.1.1.2 - "DSP Settings" for
information on configuring DSP addresses on the APmax. The Test Size (Bytes) field is used to set the size of the test packet. Select a DSP, set the test packet size, and press the Test button to intiate the communication test. The test results will be displayed in a Test Complete window
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-82Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Figure 4-26 DSP Test Complete
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-83Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 4 - Network Configuration
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-84Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 5 - System Time Manager
Chapter 5 - System Time Manager
The clock in an APmax system, by itself, is not extremely accurate. There are two methods described in this chapter that may be used to ensure the system time is correct. They are as follows:
• Manually Setting the System Time (Section 5.1) - The system time may be manually set to
the current PC time using the interface accessed through the System Configuration | System
Time Manager menu command from the system popup menu.
• Network Time Protocol (Section 5.2) - Systems may use Network Time Protocol (NTP) to
periodically synchronize the system time with the clocks of computers over the Internet. In a multiunit configuration, Unit 1 should be configured as an NTP server for each additional unit in the APmax system configuration.
Systems also use T1 synchronization to maintain accurate system time. T1 synchronization occurs (autonomously) when one or more T1’s are connected to a system. The system uses the very stable and accurate T1 signals to regulate its internal clock. Therefore, once the system time is set (manually), the system will continue to keep accurate time as long as the T1(s) stay in service.
NOTE: If there are no T1 circuits connected to the system to provide clock synchronization, and the Network Time Protocol method is not being used to periodically update the
system time, then the time should be set manually (see Section 5.1) on at least a weekly
basis to ensure the system is keeping accurate time.
5.1 Manually Setting the System Time
Network Time Protocol (see Section 5.2) is the recommended mechanism to update the system
time. If the system time is set manually, and there are no T1 circuits connected to the system to provide clock synchronization, then you should perform this function weekly to ensure the system is keeping accurate time.
To manually set the time of a system based on the current PC time, complete the following steps:
1. Right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Configuration | System Time Manager command (as
illustrated in Figure 5-1). The System Time Manager window (Figure 5-2) will be dis-
played. The name of the system for which you are managing time will be displayed at the top of the System Time Manager window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-85Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 5 - System Time Manager
Figure 5-1 System Time Manager Menu Command
Figure 5-2 System Time Manager Window
The System Time Manager window contains the following information:
Local Time
This shows the APmax UI PC’s current time.
Unit List
Time Zone
Between the Local Time and Time Zone fields is a list of the units in this system and the current time read from each unit.
This setting allows you to select the time zone in which the system resides.
Time Zone Time
Time at the selected time zone. This time is calculated based on the current computer time and the selected time zone. The system time will be set to this time when the Set Time button is pressed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-86Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 5 - System Time Manager
If this is the first time you have used this function, the Time Zone setting will default to the time zone currently set on the APmax UI PC. If you have previously used this function to set the system time, the Time Zone setting will show the time zone selected at the last use of this function.
2. To select the time zone in which the system resides, click the with the left mouse button to access the drop-down menu. Use the scroll bars on the right side of the drop-down menu to examine the entire list of time zones.
Figure 5-3 Selecting the Time Zone
3. From the drop-down list, select the time zone where the system is located. The Time Zone
Time will change to display the time according to the selected time zone.
4. Press the Set Time button to set the time on the system to the time displayed in the Time
Zone Time field. A confirmation message (see Figure 5-4) will be displayed when the
time is successfully set. Press the OK button to close the message.
Figure 5-4 Time Set Successfully Message
This change will be immediately transferred to the selected system.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-87Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
5.2 Network Time Protocol
Chapter 5 - System Time Manager
Network Time Protocol (NTP) allows systems to periodically synchronize their system time with the clocks of computers (time servers) over the Internet. These time servers maintain more accurate time than the system hardware. See http://www.ntp.org
for more information about NTP and public NTP servers.
To configure NTP for a system, complete the following steps:
1. Right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a
popup menu, and select the System Time Manager command (as illustrated in Figure 5-5).
The System Time Manager window (Figure 5-6) will be displayed. The name of the sys-
tem for which you are managing time will be displayed at the top of the System Time
Manager window.
Figure 5-5 System Time Manager Menu Command
2. Select the NTP Configuration tab (see Figure 5-6) in the System Time Manager window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 5-6 System Time Manager - NTP Configuration Tab
-88Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 5 - System Time Manager
The NTP Configuration tab displays each unit in the system (e.g. Unit 1, Unit 2) along with the host name (e.g. isdc4) and/or IP address of each time server configured for the unit. The sync status and NTP IP address displayed next to each unit shows the status and
IP of the time server that responded first. The Refresh Status button can be pressed to retrieve the current NTP sync status.
On system startup, each unit will send a broadcast query to the other units in the system once a second for five seconds. Responses are used to synchronize the local time and elect a NTP sync master.
The NTP sync master is always the lowest numbered unit in the system. The synch master will send a broadcast query to each configured time server once every five seconds. Once an NTP server responds to the request with a valid time, subsequent requests for time are sent to the time server that responded at a rate of once every five seconds. For every successful reply, the time lengthens by five seconds, not to exceed a request interval of five minutes. Each failed reply reduces the request interval by half, with a minimum request interval of five seconds. A timeout on a query resets the time to five seconds, and results in a broadcast query to all configured time servers. Loss of the connection to a time server after time has been set, will result in a major alarm.
Systems actively running APmax Release 4.0 or greater will write the current time to a sync file every five minutes. On startup, the system will wait for a response a maximum of 240 seconds before timing out. If a timeout occurs, or NTP is disabled or not found, then the system will throw a critical alarm and the system time will be set to 30 seconds later than the time in the sync file.
If a startup timeout occurs on a system with an APmax release less than 4.0 then startup will be halted until the time is set. If this occurs, the time may be set by either a successful synch to a configured NTP server or by setting the time manually from the UI using Sys-
tem Time Manager (see Section 5.1). Once the time has been set, the system will resume
startup.
Any major time change detected by the NTP synch master will be broadcasted to all units in the system. This includes any changes made from the UI.
Please note, if NTP is not utilized and a time synch alarm is not desired on the system, then the NTP server on each unit may be set to "DISABLED".
3. Add or delete NTP servers from the list using the corresponding buttons.
To add an NTP server, select any unit in the NTP Servers list and click the Add button. An
Add NTP Server window similar to Figure 5-7 will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-89Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 5 - System Time Manager
Figure 5-7 Add an NTP Server
In the Server Address field, enter a host name (i.e., time.nist.gov) or an IP address (i.e.,
192.43.244.18) of an NTP server, select a unit on the APmax system, and press the OK button. System Time Manager will attempt to resolve the supplied address, and a warning will appear if the resolution fails. To exit the Add NTP Server window without entering a new server, press the Cancel button.
To delete an NTP server, select the time server address beneath its unit node in the NTP
Configuration tab and press the Delete button located below the list of servers.
When setting up a multi-unit system, Unit 1 should be configured as an NTP server for each additional unit in the APmax system configuration. The IP to specify as the NTP server when setting up each additional unit should be the Administration Address for Unit
1, see Chapter 4 - "Network Configuration", Section 4.1.1.1 - "General Settings" for more
information.
4. Set the number of synch retries the system should attempt before throwing a time alarm indicating it could not synch to an NTP server. This is done by entering a value between 1 and 100 into the Synch Retry Attempts field. The default value is 1.
5. When all additions, deletions, and settings are finished in the NTP Configuration tab, press the Set NTP Servers button to save the changes. If the System Time Manager is closed without the Set NTP Servers button being pressed, all changes will be lost. Saved changes will be immediately transferred to all units in the selected system. A confirma-
tion message (see Figure 5-8) will be displayed when the NTP servers are successfully
saved. Press the OK button to close the message.
Figure 5-8 NTP Servers Set Successfully Message
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-90Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 6 - Serial Configuration
Chapter 6 - Serial Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure serial ports for APmax system units. To access the Serial
Port Configuration interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Configuration | Serial Configuration
Figure 6-1 Serial Configuration Menu Command
Figure 6-2 Serial Port Configuration Window
The left-hand side of the Serial Port Configuration window contains a list of APmax system units and serial ports that have already been configured. Selecting a unit/port combination in the list will display its serial port settings in the right-hand side of the window, where the serial port signaling values may be modified. The settings in the Selected Serial Port Settings section are
To delete a serial port from the configuration, select the unit/port combination you wish to delete in the Serial Ports list and press the Delete button below the list.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-91Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 6 - Serial Configuration
To add a serial port to the configuration, press the Add button below the Serial Ports list. An Add
Serial Port window similar to Figure 6-3 will be displayed. If all serial ports for all APmax units
have already been defined, the Add button will be disabled.
Figure 6-3 Add Serial Port Window
Specify the following settings in the Add Serial Port window and press the OK button to complete the addition of the serial port.
Unit
The unit on the APmax system for which this serial port is being configured. If all of the serial ports (1 and 2) of a unit have already been defined in the Serial Port Configuration interface, that unit number will not be available when adding new serial ports.
Serial Port
Mode
Parity
Data Bits
The serial port (1 or 2) that is being configured on the selected
APmax unit. If a serial port has already been defined for the selected APmax unit in the Serial Port Configuration interface, it will not be available as an option when adding new serial ports.
The mode the selected serial port uses to connect to the
APmax unit. The options are listed in the drop-down control:
None, RS232, and RS449. The default mode is RS232.
Parity checking is used to detect transmission errors in the serial link’s data stream. The Parity field indicates the type of parity checking used in the data transmission. The valid values are listed in the drop-down control: Even, Mark, None, Odd, and Space. The default value is no parity (None).
The Data Bits field specifies the number of bits that represent a single character transmitted over the serial link. The valid values are listed in the drop-down control: 5, 6, 7 or 8 bits. The default value is 8 data bits.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-92Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Stop Bits
Chapter 6 - Serial Configuration
The Stop Bits field specifies the number of stop bits used to indicate the end of a transmitted character. The valid values are listed in the drop-down control: 0, 1, or 2 bits. The default value is 1 stop bit.
Baud Rate
The Baud Rate specifies the signaling speed, in bits-per-seconds (bps). The valid values are listed in the drop-down control: 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps.
The default value is 9600bps.
Closing the Serial Port Configuration window will save any changes to the serial port settings. To apply any changes to a serial port’s settings to the APmax system without closing the window, press the Save button in the Selected Serial Port Settings section of the window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-93Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 6 - Serial Configuration
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-94Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure Digital Signalling Level 1 (DS1) ports, Digital Signalling
Level 3 (DS3) ports, and Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ports for APmax systems. To access the
Digital Carrier Configuration interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command
Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Configuration | Trunks | Digital
Carrier Configuration command (as illustrated in Figure 7-1). The name of the system for which
you are configuring ports will be displayed at the top of the Digital Carrier Configuration window
Figure 7-1 Digital Carrier Configuration Menu Command
Section 7.1 - "Digital Carrier Setup" provides instructions for configuring DS1 and DS3 ports.
Section 7.2 - "PRI Setup" provides instructions for configuring PRI ports.
7.1 Digital Carrier Setup
Select the Digital Carrier Setup tab (Figure 7-2) in the Digital Carrier Configuration window to
configure DS1 and DS3 ports for the APmax system.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-95Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
Figure 7-2 Digital Carrier Configuration Window
The Digital Carrier Setup tab is partitioned into two panes. The left-hand pane contains a tree structure of each unit in the selected APmax system, and the DS1 and DS3 ports beneath that unit.
The right-hand pane displays the settings that can be configured for the unit, DS1, or DS3 that is selected in the left-hand pane. These settings are described in the following sections:
• Section 7.1.1 - "Unit Settings"
• Section 7.1.2 - "DS1 Settings"
• Section 7.1.3 - "DS3 Settings"
7.1.1 Unit Settings
When an APmax unit is selected in the left-hand pane of the Digital Carrier Setup tab (see Figure
7-2), the Sync Master setting and DS1 Enable and Disable buttons will be displayed in the right-
hand pane. The functions associated with these controls are described below:
Sync Master
The sync master port is the preferred source of external clock synchronization, and is used to synchronize all internal clocks to the network or
BITS clock.
By default the Sync Master for a unit is set to “Free Run.” Any port that is enabled on this unit can be the sync master by selecting the port in the
Sync Master drop-down list.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-96Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
DS1s
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
Note: This function is only available for systems with APmax Release 4.3 or greater.
The Enable and Disable buttons are used to activate and deactivate all
DS1 ports on the selected unit. This is done in a non-volatile manner so the state is preserved if the unit is rebooted. Note that the DS1 Status setting for individual ports will not change when these buttons are pressed. This allows all DS1 ports to be easily disabled when upgrading a system and then re-enabled, and returned to their previous status, when the upgrade is complete.
7.1.2 DS1 Settings
When any of the DS1-1 to DS1-8 ports are selected in the left-hand pane of the Digital Carrier
Figure 7-3 DS1 Settings
The top four settings below are displayed by default. Click the tree symbol next to the
Advanced label to display the bottom four settings.
DS1 Status
Select whether the port should be Enabled or Disabled.
T1 Framing
Specify the T1 framing format that the switch should be using.
Options include D4 and ESF (Extended Superframe Format).
ESF is less susceptible to false Yellow alarms caused by repetitive patterns in audio channels.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-97Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
T1 Line Coding
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
Specify the T1 line coding that the switch should be using.
Options include AMI or B8ZS.
Transmit LBO Mode
Select the T1 cable length, T3 dB, or E1 ohms.
Transmit Haul
Mode
Options include Short and Long.
Receive Haul Mode
Used in conjunction with Receive Sensitivity to set the overall sensitivity on the DS1 port. Options include:
• Short - Select for cable lengths less than 655 feet.
• Long - Select for cable stretches longer than 655 feet.
• Monitor - Select for listening on a monitor port (up to -46dB attenuation in resistive bridge and cable). This option should be selected if using the monitor port on the patch panel.
Receive Sensitivity
If Receive Haul Mode is set to Long, this setting will be used to indicate the dB of attenuation on long haul signals that can be tolerated (i.e., amplified). This setting is ignored if Receive
Haul Mode is set to Short or Monitor. The available range is from -32 to 0.
Impedance
Specify the impedance to use, in ohms. Options include 100,
110, or 120. The selected value should be 100 for T1s.
7.1.3 DS3 Settings
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-98Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
Figure 7-4 DS3 Settings
The DS3 Status and DS3 Framing settings below are displayed by default. Click the tree symbol next to the Advanced label to display the DS2-1 to DS2-7 settings.
DS3 Status
Select whether the DS3 should be Enabled or Disabled.
DS3 Framing
Specify the framing format that should be used for the DS3.
Options include Cbit and M13.
DS2-1 Framing to
DS2-7 Framing
Specify the framing for each of the DS2-1 to DS2-7 ports for the
DS3. Options include D2 and G747.
When any of the DS3-1 to DS3-28 ports are selected in the left-hand pane of the Digital Carrier
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-99Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
DS1 Status
T1 Framing
Figure 7-5 DS3-1 to DS3-28 Settings
Select whether the port should be Enabled or Disabled.
Specify the T1 framing format that the switch should be using.
Options include D4 and ESF (Extended Superframe Format).
ESF is less susceptible to false Yellow alarms caused by repetitive patterns in audio channels.
7.2 PRI Setup
Select the PRI Setup tab (Figure 7-6) in the Digital Carrier Configuration window to view a list of
PRI ports which have been configured for the APmax system.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-100Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
Figure 7-6 PRI Setup Tab
PRI ports can be configured for the APmax system by pressing the Add button located at the bot-
.
Figure 7-7 Add PRI Trunk
Unit
TDM Interface
PRI Type
Select the unit on the APmax system which will be configured with the new PRI port entry.
Select the Time Division Multiplexed Audio Interface (TDM
Interface) port for this entry.
Select the type of PRI switch associated with this entry.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-101Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Description
Chapter 7 - Digital Carrier Configuration
Enter a short description to help identify this entry in the user interface.
To delete a PRI port entry from this APmax system, select the entry in the list and press the Delete button located at the bottom of the PRI Setup tab.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-102Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
This chapter primarily describes how to configure SS7 for APmax systems. SS7, also known as
Signaling System #7, is an out-of-band signaling system used to provide basic routing information, call set-up, and other call termination functions. Signaling is removed from the voice channel itself and put on a separate data network. The APmax uses the SS7 network to transfer data related to many of the services provided by the APmax. The SS7 Configuration interface in the
APmax UI allows for the configuration of local point code, linksets, combined linksets, SS7 routing, Global Title Translation (GTT) information, and AIN settings.
This chapter also describes the Service Configuration interface (see Section 8.7), which is used to
service settings (e.g. subsystem numbers, access numbers) of APmax applications that do not have an independent configuration interface.
To access the SS7 Configuration interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Configuration | SS7 Config-
uration command (as illustrated in Figure 8-1). The name of the system for which you are
configuring ports will be displayed at the top of the SS7 Configuration window (Figure 8-2).
Figure 8-1 SS7 Configuration Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-103Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-2 SS7 Configuration Window
The SS7 Configuration window is partitioned into six tabs: General, Linksets, Combined Linksets,
Routing, Global Title Translation, and AIN. The progression through the tabs from left to right provides a general order to setting up the SS7 interface within the APmax system. For instance, the local point code in the General tab should be defined before any linksets are defined, and the linksets must be defined before any combined linksets can be created. Changes to the configuration are sent to the APmax system and saved as they are performed.
The functions available within the tabs are described in the following sections:
• General Tab - Section 8.1 - "General SS7 Settings"
• Linksets Tab - Section 8.2 - "Linkset Configuration"
• Combined Linksets Tab - Section 8.3 - "Combined Linksets"
• Routing Tab - Section 8.4 - "Linkset Route Management"
• Global Title Translation Tab - Section 8.5 - "Global Title Translation"
• AIN Tab - Section 8.6 - "AIN Settings"
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-104Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
8.1 General SS7 Settings
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
The General tab (see Figure 8-2) is displayed when the SS7 Configuration window is initially
opened and contains the following settings:
Local Point Code
The SS7 address assigned to this APmax system. If a point code has not already been defined, 0.0.0 will be displayed in this field.
SS7 point codes are partitioned into 3-digit sections: network, cluster, and member. The value of each portion of the point code must be in range of 1-255.
AIN Point Code
AIN Translation Type
The point code used when the APmax originates an AIN query.
The translation type used when the APmax originates an AIN query. The default value for this field is 204.
CLASS GTT Point Code
The point code used when the APmax originates a CLASS GTT query.
CLASS GTT Translation Type
The translation type used when the APmax originates a CLASS
GTT query. The default value for this field is 150.
Exception Point Code 1
The first point code for which the send notification parameter will be removed.
Exception Point Code 2
The second point code for which the send notification parameter will be removed.
The values in the General tab fields will be saved immediately upon leaving the General tab. It is recommended that a valid point code be entered before any linksets are created for this system.
8.2 Linkset Configuration
An SS7 linkset is a group of SS7 links that are all physically connected to the same far-end device. An SS7 link is an individual signaling path between the APmax and the specified far-end
device. The Linksets tab (see Figure 8-3) is where linksets are added (see Section 8.2.1) or
removed (Section 8.2.2) from the system, and where channels (i.e. SS7 links) are added (see Sec-
tion 8.2.3) or removed (see Section 8.2.4) from linksets.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-105Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-3 Linksets Tab
The Linksets tab is partitioned into three sections: Linksets, Linkset Info, and Links. The Linksets section contains a list of the linksets that have been defined.
The Linkset Info section contains the properties of the currently selected linkset. Linkset proper-
ties are described in Section 8.2.1 - "Adding a Linkset". The only property that can be changed
for an existing linkset is Test On Startup. Clicking in this property will display a drop-down
menu as illustrated in Figure 8-4 below.
Figure 8-4 Test On Startup Drop-down Menu
Select Yes or No in the drop-down to enable or disable testing on startup.
The Links section contains a list of the SS7 links that have been defined for the selected linkset.
Link properties are described in Section 8.2.3 - "Adding a Link to a Linkset".
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-106Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
8.2.1 Adding a Linkset
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
To add a linkset to the SS7 interface, press the Add button below the list of linksets on the left-
hand side of the SS7 Configuration window. An Add Linkset window similar to Figure 8-5 will
be displayed.
Figure 8-5 Add Linkset Window
Populate the following fields in the Add Linkset window and press the OK button to create the new linkset.
Linkset ID
Select an ID number between 1 and 16 for the new linkset.
This number must be unique within this APmax system.
Description
Enter a short description of this linkset.
Far End Point Code
Enter a far-end point code for this linkset that is unique within this system.
Test On Startup
Select Yes to enable testing of this linkset on startup or No to disable testing. This is the only linkset property that can be changed after the linkset is created.
8.2.2 Deleting a Linkset
To remove a linkset from the SS7 interface, select the linkset to delete in the list on the left-hand
side of the Linksets tab (see Figure 8-3) and press the Delete button located below the list.
displayed and you will have to delete all of the links (see Section 8.2.4 - "Deleting a Link from a
Linkset") from the linkset before it can be deleted.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-107Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-6 Unable To Remove Linkset Warning
If the linkset you are attempting to delete is part of a combined linkset, you will have to uncom-
bine it before it can be deleted (see Section 8.3 - "Combined Linksets").
8.2.3 Adding a Link to a Linkset
To add one or more links to a linkset, select the linkset in the list on the left-hand side of the Link-
sets tab (see Figure 8-3) and press the Add button in the Links section (lower-right corner) of the
tab. The Add Links window (see Figure 8-7 below) will be displayed.
Figure 8-7 Add Links Window
A list of available channels is displayed on the left side of the window, and a list of the channels that are going to be added to the linkset is on the right side. The channels in the Available Chan-
nels list are retrieved from the APmax system each time this window is opened. To be considered
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-108Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
(e.g., used as a member of a voice trunk group). In addition to DS channels, both RS449 ports for each unit in the selected system are also available to be assigned as channels in a linkset, if they have not already been assigned.
WARNING: Assigning an RS449 port to a linkset will set the mode of that port to RS449, overriding any previous settings of that port that were made using other interfaces. For example, if
port 1 on unit 1 is configured as RS232 in the Serial Configuration interface (see Chapter 6), and
port 1 on unit 1 is then assigned to a linkset in the SS7 Configuration interface, the port will now be RS449. It is recommended that a port already in use by another interface not be added as a channel to a linkset.
To add channels to the linkset, select up to eight channels from the Available Channels list and press the Add button in the middle of the window. The selected channels will be moved to the
Channels In the Linkset list.
To remove channels that have been assigned to the linkset during this Add Links session, select the channels in the Channels In the Linkset list and press the Remove button in the middle of the window. The selected channels will be moved to the bottom of the Available Channels list.
The SLC for each channel must be specified before exiting the Add Links window. To specify an
SLC for a channel, click in the SLC cell as illustrated in Figure 8-8 and enter a number between 0
and 15 that is not already in use by channels assigned to this linkset.
Figure 8-8 Changing the SLC for a Link
The data rate for each channel can also be specified before exiting the Add Links window. To
either 56k or 64k in the drop-down menu.
Figure 8-9 Changing the Data Rate for a Link
The SLC and data rate for channels cannot be changed once the OK button is pressed, unless they are deleted and re-added to the linkset.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-109Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
A maximum of eight channels can exist in a single linkset. Also, the total of all channels in all linksets for each unit in the APmax system may not exceed eight. If channels already exist in the linkset and the number of channels added to the linkset would make the total over eight, an error will be displayed when the OK button is pressed in the Add Links window. Press the OK button to complete the addition of the channels in the Channels In the Linkset list to the linkset.
8.2.4 Deleting a Link from a Linkset
To delete a link from a linkset, select the linkset in the list on the left-hand side of the Linksets tab
(see Figure 8-3). The links assigned to the linkset will be displayed in the Links section (lower-
right corner) of the tab. Select the link to delete and press the Delete button in the Links section.
The link has now been deleted.
8.3 Combined Linksets
A combined linkset is the logical grouping of two linksets into a single entity that can be used to transmit messages to given destinations. Typically a combined linkset is created when two linksets exist where each linkset is connected to one STP in a “mated” STP pair. A mated STP pair provides redundant message routing to other SS7 point codes. Therefore, any link in a combined linkset can be used to transmit a message to these far-end point codes.
The Combined Linksets tab (Figure 8-10) allows for the configuration and display of the com-
bined linksets on the APmax system.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-110Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-10 Combined Linksets Tab
The list on the left-hand side of the Combined Linksets tab displays all of the defined linksets currently not combined. The list on the right-hand side of the tab displays any existing combined linksets.
To create a combined linkset, select two linksets from the list on the left and press the Combine button. The selected linksets will be removed from the left-hand list and will be displayed as a combined linkset in the right-hand list.
To remove a combined linkset, select the combined linkset from the list on the right and press the
Uncombine button. The linksets that were combined will be separated and moved to the list on the left-hand side of the tab, where they can be assigned to new combined linksets.
8.4 Linkset Route Management
If linksets are being used, assigning point codes to linksets or combined linksets is necessary for the APmax system to determine the SS7 link to use when transmitting SS7 messages. The Rout-
ing tab (see Figure 8-11) is used to assign point codes to linksets (collections of SS7 data links
that may use the same point code).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-111Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-11 Routing Tab
The Routes list in the Routing tab displays a list of far-end point codes that have been defined and the linkset that will be used to reach each far-end point code. The APmax cannot send an SS7 message to a point code until that point code is added to this list and is assigned to a linkset. If the specified linkset is part of a combined linkset, then message routing to the point code can use either linkset in the combined linkset.
Routes can be added using the Add button (see Section 8.4.2) or removed by selecting the route in
the Routes list and pressing the Delete button.
8.4.1 Default Routing
The default route is used when no specific route is found for a given point code. Using a default route allows multiple switches to use a linkset without requiring each switch's point code to be entered into the route table. A default route can be designated by using the Default Route Linkset
selection box (see Figure 8-12) to choose the route and then pressing the Set button. Pressing the
Disable button will unassign the default route.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-112Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-12 Selecting a Default Route
8.4.2 Adding a Route
To add a route to the SS7 configuration, press the Add button located below the Routes list in the
Routing tab (Figure 8-11) of the SS7 Configuration window. An Add New Route window similar
to Figure 8-13 will be displayed.
Figure 8-13 Add New Route Window
The Add New Route window contains the Far End Point Code field, the Route Description field, and a list of linksets that have been defined in the SS7 configuration. If a linkset in the list is part of a combined linkset, the Mate Linkset column in the list will display the description of the mate.
Enter the far-end point code and a description of the route, select which linkset the route is associated with from the list, and press the OK button to add the route to the SS7 configuration.
8.5 Global Title Translation
Global Title Translation (GTT) is an SS7 standard operation that uses telephone network-related information in an SS7 message in order to determine the destination address of that SS7 message.
It allows SS7 message originators to send messages without knowing the final destination of the
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-113Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
SS7 message. SS7 messages are routed to network elements, such as the APmax, where the
Global Title Address is translated to a destination SS7 point code. Once the translation is performed, the message is forwarded to that SS7 Signaling Point. This section describes how to provision the APmax so that it can properly translate received SS7 messages that require Global Title
Translation.
The GTT user interface (see Figure 8-14) can be accessed by selecting the Global Title Transla-
tion tab in the SS7 Configuration window. Instructions for opening the SS7 Configuration win-
dow are given at the beginning of Chapter 8.
Figure 8-14 Global Titles & Translation Types
The Global Title Translation tab contains two sub-tabs, Global Titles & Translation Types, and
Advanced. The Global Titles & Translation Types tab is used to manage GTTs (see Section 8.5.1)
and translation types (see Section 8.5.2). The Advanced tab (see Section 8.5.3) is used to custom-
ize the number of digits allowed in global addresses defined for a map number. This customization must take place in the Advanced tab prior to defining GTTs that will use the map number.
8.5.1 Defining a GTT
Complete the following steps to define a GTT for the selected APmax system:
1. Press the Add button in the Global Title Table section. A new row with the default GTT values will be added to the table.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-114Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
2. Click in each of the following cells in the new row and enter the appropriate data:
Map Number
The Map Number is a number, from 0-19, that associates translations of the same nature under one map number. There may be multiple entries in this table that use the same map number.
All Global Title Values that translate to a destination of some type (e.g., Service Switching Point (SSP), Service Control Point
(SCP), etc.) may use the same map number. This map number is used in one or more Translation Type To Subsystem Number
Translations table entries, so that those types of messages are translated to the same addresses.
Global Address
One through 10-digit Global Address number. This is the Global Title information in the SS7 message to convert to the SS7 address specified in the Primary Route. This value is typically an NPA, NPA-NXX, or 10-digit phone number.
Typically, three different lengths (3, 6, or 10 digits) of Global
Address entries may be made for each map number from within the Global Title Table section. For example, GT entries for map number 2 may contain the Global Addresses: 605, 605-
995, 605-996, 605-995-6120. These entries would constitute the allowed 3 different lengths of Global Address, 3-digit, 6digit, and 10-digit Global Addresses. A subsequent attempt to enter a Global Address that was not 3, 6, or 10 digits will result in an error message. However, up to four different lengths
(from 0 to 10 digits) of Global Address entries may be made for a map number if the map number is entered in the Advanced
tab (see Section 8.5.3) and set up with custom map key lengths
prior to entering the map number in the Global Title Table section.
Function Selector
This field indicates what actions will be performed by this translation and in what state the SS7 message will be after translation. The default action is Final Translation. Other options are available through the drop-down menu:
• Final Translation – no further Global Title Translation will need to be performed on the SS7 message after this translation.
• Final Translation & Alter SSN – no further Global Title
Translation will need to be performed on the SS7 message after this translation. Set the called SSN in the message to the value specified in the Subsystem Number field from the
Translation Type to Subsystem Number Translation table.
• Intermediate Translation – the translation performed here does not result in the final destination address of the message. Perform the translation specified in these tables and mark the SS7 message as requiring additional global title translations at the point code specified in the Primary Route field.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-115Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Primary Route
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
The primary 9-digit SS7 physical network address. This is the
SS7 address to use when the associated Global Address is found in the SS7 message’s Global Title information.
The value of this field is set by clicking in the Primary Route cell and selecting a destination point code from the drop-down list,
as illustrated in Figure 8-15. The destination point codes avail-
able in the drop-down list include the Local Point Code defined
in the General tab (see Section 8.1) of the SS7 Configuration
window, and the Far End Point Codes of the routes defined in
the Routing tab (see Section 8.4) of the SS7 Configuration win-
dow.
Figure 8-15 Selecting a Destination Point Code
Alternate Route
An optional, secondary 9-digit SS7 physical network address.
If the Primary Route cannot be found, the APmax will try the
Alternate Route. The value of this field is set by clicking in the
Alternate Route cell and selecting a destination point code from the drop-down list, similar to the procedure described above for setting the Primary Route.
3. Click a location in the window other than the new row to save the new row.
4. To delete a GTT entry, select the row to remove and press the Delete button in the Global
Title Table section.
8.5.2 Defining a Translation Type
Complete the following steps to define a Translation Type for the selected APmax system:
1. Press the Add button in the Translation Type Table section. A new row with the default
Translation Type values will be added to the table.
2. Click in each of the following cells in the new row and enter the appropriate data:
Translation Type
The Translation Type value received in the SS7 message that requires Global Title Translation. The valid range is 1-254.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-116Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Subsystem Number
The value to place in the called party subsystem number field if
Alter SSN is one of the actions specified in the Function Selector field. The valid range is 0-254. Subsystem number 0 should not be used if the Function Selector is set to "Final
Translation & Alter SSN". Also, subsystem number 1 is reserved and cannot be used in this field.
Map Number
The Map Number is a number, from 0-19. The value in this field corresponds to map numbers in the Global Title Table section. This map number indicates how the Global Address should be translated for SS7 messages containing this Translation Type value.
The value of this field is set by clicking in the Map Number cell and selecting a map number from the drop-down list, as illus-
trated in Figure 8-16. The values available in the drop-down list
are the map numbers that have been defined for GTT entries in the Global Title Table section.
Expansion Route
Figure 8-16 Selecting a Map Number
The expansion 9-digit SS7 physical network address. The SS7 message is forwarded to this SS7 address if no Global Address in the corresponding map entries in the Global Title Table section matches the Global Title information in the received SS7 message.
The value of this field is set by clicking in the Expansion Route cell and selecting a destination point code from the drop-down
list, as illustrated in Figure 8-17. The destination point codes
available in the drop-down list include the Far End Point Codes
of the routes defined in the Routing tab (see Section 8.4) of the
SS7 Configuration window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 8-17 Selecting an Expansion Point Code
-117Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
3. Click a location in the window other than the new row to save the new row.
4. To delete a Translation Type entry, select the row to remove and press the Delete button in the Translation Type Table section.
8.5.3 GTT Advanced Settings
The Advanced tab (see Figure 8-18) allows the editing of map keys, so that four global addresses
of any length from 0 to 10 digits can be defined for a map number. For example, map number 2 could be configured to allow global addresses with 4, 5, 7, and 8-digit lengths. This editing of map keys is not allowed if there are any existing GTT entries that use the map number. If a GTT entry is made in the Global Titles & Translation Types tab, and its map number is not pre-defined in the Advanced tab, then an entry for that map number (with map key lengths of 3, 6, 10, and 0) will be automatically inserted into the Advanced tab.
Figure 8-18 GTT Advanced Tab
To make a new entry in the Advanced tab, press the Add button. A new row with the default map key values will be added to the table. Click in each cell of the new row and enter the desired map number (from 0 to 19) and key lengths (from 0 to 10). Now GTT entries may be made in the
Global Titles & Translation Types tab for the map number entered in the new row. The global addresses of those GTT entries may contain the number of digits found in any of the four key lengths specified for the entered map number.
To delete an entry, select the row and press the Delete button.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-118Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
8.6 AIN Settings
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
The AIN tab in the SS7 Configuration window (see Figure 8-19) contains the interfaces used to
configure AIN (Advanced Intelligent Network)-related settings on the selected APmax system.
The settings in the AIN tab are partitioned into three tabs that are described in the following sections:
• Section 8.6.1 - "Seven-To-Ten Mapping"
• Section 8.6.2 - "Destination Addresses"
• Section 8.6.3 - "Toll Call Management"
8.6.1 Seven-To-Ten Mapping
The Seven To Ten Mapping tab (Figure 8-19) is used to define combinations of NXXs, point
codes, and NPAs that will be used by the APmax to expand 7-digit numbers received from a switch into 10-digit numbers that can be used in responses.
Figure 8-19 Seven To Ten Mapping Tab
Existing combinations are retrieved from the APmax by entering the point code of the combination into the Point Code field and then pressing the Find button.
To add a new AIN seven-to-ten mapping entry, press the Add button in the Seven To Ten Mapping
section. An Add Seven To Ten window (see Figure 8-20) will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-119Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-20 Add Seven To Ten Window
Populate the following fields in the Add Seven To Ten window and press the OK button to save the new entry.
NXX-XXXX
Enter a string of numbers 1 to 7 digits in length that will be used in conjunction with the incoming point code to match incoming numbers with an NPA. If this value is set to all zeros then the
APmax will only use the point code to find an NPA for the incoming number.
Point Code
NPA
Enter the point code of the switch that will be sending the trigger to the APmax.
Enter the 3-digit NPA that will be used to expand incoming 7digit numbers that match the entered NXX-XXXX and point code.
8.6.2 Destination Addresses
The Destination Address tab (Figure 8-21) is used to manage the AIN destination addresses on the
selected APmax system. A destination address is the 10-digit Directory Number (DN) of the
Intelligent Peripheral (IP) that is to be used when doing AIN play and collect operations. The IP plays voice prompts and collects digits for menus in AIN applications and services.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-120Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-21 Destination Address Tab
To create a new destination address entry, press the Add button in the Destination Address section.
An Add Destination Address window (see Figure 8-22) will be displayed.
Figure 8-22 Add Destination Address Window
Populate the following fields in the Add Destination Address window and press the OK button to save the new entry.
NPA-NXX
Point Code
Destination
Address
Enter the incoming 6-digit NPA-NXX that will be used for this new address.
Enter the incoming point code.
Enter the 10-digit destination address.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-121Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
8.6.3 Toll Call Management
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
The Toll Call Management tab (Figure 8-23) is used to define a set of “local” (toll-free) called
numbers and assign those numbers to call originators. Any number called from an originator that is not on their list of “local” numbers will be treated as a toll call.
Figure 8-23 Toll Call Management Tab
The Toll Call Management tab is partitioned into three sections: Called Numbers (see Section
8.6.3.1), Called Areas (see Section 8.6.3.2), and Calling Numbers (see Section 8.6.3.3).
8.6.3.1 Called Numbers
The Called Numbers list contains any number that one or more originators in a service area may dial without incurring a charge. The numbers in the list may be NPAs, NPA-NXXs, or 10-digit directory numbers (DN). Called Numbers are assigned to Called Areas. Each Called Number may be assigned to only one Called Area.
Adding Called Numbers
New Called Numbers can be added by: clicking the Add button below the Called Numbers list, or by clicking the right-hand mouse button within the list and selecting the Add New Number com-
mand in the popup menu, as illustrated in Figure 8-24.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-122Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-24 Add New Called Number
When one of the Add commands is selected, a new entry is added to the list and a prompt to enter the new Called Number is displayed. Enter the new Called Number directly into the prompt (see
Figure 8-25 below). Valid Called Numbers must be in one of the following forms: 3-digit NPA,
6-digit NPA-NXX, or 10-digit directory number.
After the number has been entered, press the <Enter> key to accept the number. This action will terminate the edit mode for the current number, and the number will then be formatted and displayed. In addition, a new entry will be shown with the "New Called Number" prompt. If you have additional numbers to enter, simply type the next number at this prompt and press <Enter> to accept the number. When you have finished entering new numbers, simply press the <Enter> key without entering any numbers at the "New Called Number" prompt. This behavior facilitates rapid data entry when multiple numbers need to be entered.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 8-25 Entering a New Called Number
-123Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Assigning Called Numbers to Called Areas
Each Called Number should eventually be assigned to one, and only one, Called Area. To assign one or more Called Numbers to a Called Area, use one of the following methods:
1. Drag-and-Drop:
a. Select one or more numbers in the Called Numbers list. The selection is accomplished via the normal Windows list selection mechanisms. That is, a single number is selected by clicking on that number in the list. Multiple, contiguous numbers are selected by holding the <Shift> key down while clicking on the last number in the range to be selected. Multiple, non-contiguous numbers are selected by holding the
<Ctrl> key down while selecting multiple desired numbers.
b. Click and hold down the left-hand mouse button on one of the selected numbers.
While holding down the left-hand mouse button, drag the selection to one of the area names in the Called Areas list.
c. When the desired Called Area name is highlighted, release the left-hand mouse button to drop the Called Number(s) into the Called Area.
2. “Add to Area” button:
a. Select one or more numbers in the Called Numbers list using the same actions explained in the first step of the Drag-and-Drop instructions above.
b. Select one area name in the Called Areas list by clicking on the name with the lefthand mouse button.
c. Press the "Add to Area" button between the Called Numbers and Called Areas list.
When the assignment is performed, the selected Called Numbers will be displayed below the target Called Area illustrating that these numbers are members of this area. In addition, the target
Called Area name will be displayed under the selected numbers in the Called Numbers list, indicating that this number has been assigned to an area and showing the area to which it has been
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-124Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-26 Called Number Assignments
Deleting Called Numbers
Called Numbers can be deleted from the Called Numbers list by selecting one or more numbers in the list and then performing one of the following actions: pressing the <Delete> key, clicking the
Delete button below the Called Numbers list, or selecting the Delete Number command from a popup menu invoked by clicking the right-hand mouse button on one of the selected numbers.
A delete confirmation window is displayed before the delete action is actually performed. The user can choose to abort the delete action or continue with the delete action.
The deleted number(s) will be removed from the Called Numbers list. Also, if the numbers are assigned to Called Areas, they will be deleted from their respective areas in the Called Areas list.
Deleting Called Number Area Assignment
You may delete a Called Number from a Called Area by either selecting and deleting the number from the area in the Called Area list, or by selecting and deleting the area name under the desired number in the Called Numbers list. The delete mechanisms are the same three choices: press the
<Delete> key, click the Delete button associated with the list, or select the Delete Number command from a popup menu.
A delete confirmation window is displayed before the delete action is actually performed. The user can choose to abort the delete action or continue with the delete action.
The Called Numbers and Called Areas lists will be updated appropriately.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-125Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
8.6.3.2 Called Areas
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Called Areas are logical collections of Called Numbers. For instance, one area may contain the
"800" series of NPAs, and other areas may represent cities/ towns or other extended service areas.
Each area is identified with a name chosen by the telephone company administrator. Each Called
Area is assigned to one or more Calling Numbers. There may be as many, or as few, areas as necessary to assign the correct Called Numbers to the list of Calling Numbers.
Adding Called Areas
Adding Called Areas is similar to adding new Called Numbers (see Section 8.6.3.1): select the
Add button below the Called Areas list, or click the right-hand mouse button in the Called Areas list area and select the Add New Area command from the popup menu. The same edit mode behavior as Called Numbers is also exhibited, where an editable prompt is displayed until you have completed entering the desired areas.
At the prompt, enter the name of the Called Area. Called Area names typically describe the type of Called Numbers that they will contain, e.g. the name of the city or town.
Assigning Called Areas to Calling Numbers
Each Called Area can be assigned to one or more Calling Numbers. This assignment defines, for each calling number, the called numbers that are considered toll-free. To assign one or more
Called Areas to a Calling Number, use one of the following methods:
1. Drag-and-Drop:
a. Select one or more numbers in the Called Areas list. The selection is accomplished via the normal Windows list selection mechanisms. That is, a single area is selected by clicking on the area name in the list. Multiple, contiguous areas are selected by holding the <Shift> key down while clicking on the last area name in the range to be selected. Multiple, non-contiguous areas are selected by holding the <Ctrl> key down while selecting multiple desired areas.
b. Click and hold down the left-hand mouse button on one of the selected area names.
While holding down the left-hand mouse button, drag the selection to one of the numbers in the Calling Numbers list.
c. When the desired Calling Number is highlighted, release the left-hand mouse button to drop the Called Area(s) into the Calling Number.
2. “Add to Calling Numbers” button:
a. Select one or more area names in the Called Areas list using the same actions explained in step 1 in the Drag-and-Drop section above.
b. Select one or more areas in the Calling Numbers list using the same selection actions as explained in step 1 in the Drag-and-Drop section above.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-126Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration c. Press the "Add to Calling Numbers" button between the Called Areas and Calling
Numbers list.
Note that the advantage of using the "Add To Calling Numbers" button is that multiple Calling
Numbers targets can be selected and populated at one time.
When the assignment is performed, the selected Called Areas will be displayed below the target
Calling Number(s) illustrating that these areas can be called toll-free from the calling number.
Figure 8-27 Area Assignments for Calling Numbers
Deleting Called Areas
Areas can be deleted from the Called Areas list by selecting one or more area names and performing the normal delete actions: press the <Delete> key, click the Delete button, or select the Delete
Area command from the popup menu.
Again, the user must confirm the delete request before the delete is performed. The area(s) will be removed from the Called Areas list. Also, any reference to the area(s) in the Called Numbers and Calling Numbers lists will be removed.
8.6.3.3 Calling Numbers
The Calling Numbers list contains call originators or originator groups that are within a telephone company's service area. The numbers in this list may be defined as NPAs, NPA-NXXs, or complete 10-digit directory numbers. This list should include, either as a specified 10-digit DN entry or as a member of a NPA or NPA-NXX group, each originating DN that can be provided enhanced services on the APmax. The definition of these entries depends on how the telephone company defines local (toll-free) calling for its customers. If local calls are defined based on originating area, then this list will include originating areas (e.g. NPA-NXXs). If local calls can be individually selected per customer, then the list will include each originating DN.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-127Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Adding Calling Numbers
Adding Calling Numbers is similar to adding new Called Numbers (see Section 8.6.3.1): select
the Add button below the Calling Numbers list, or click the right-hand mouse button in the Call-
ing Numbers list area and select the Add New Number command from the popup menu. The same edit mode behavior as Called Numbers is also exhibited, where an editable prompt is displayed until you have completed entering the desired groups.
Valid Calling Numbers must be in one of the following forms: 3-digit NPA, 6-digit NPA-NXX, or
10-digit directory number.
Deleting Calling Numbers Areas
Called Areas can be deleted from selected Calling Numbers. This is done when a Calling Number can no longer call numbers in that area as toll-free. To delete Calling Number Areas, select one or more area names in the Calling Numbers list and delete them using one of the delete mechanisms
(e.g. <Delete> key, Delete button, Delete Number popup menu command).
The user must confirm the delete request before the delete is performed. The Calling Numbers list will be updated after the delete is confirmed.
Deleting Calling Numbers
To delete Calling Numbers from the Calling Numbers list, select one or more numbers in the list and delete them using one of the delete mechanisms (e.g. <Delete> key, Delete button, Delete
Number popup menu command).
The user must confirm the delete request before the delete is performed. The Calling Numbers list will be updated after the delete is confirmed.
8.7 Service Configuration
The Service Configuration interface is used to manage service settings (e.g. subsystem numbers, access numbers) of APmax applications that do not have an independent configuration interface.
To access the Service Configuration interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the
Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Configuration | Service
Configuration command (as illustrated in Figure 8-28). The name of the system for which you
are configuring service settings will be displayed at the top of the Service Configuration window
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-128Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-28 Service Configuration Menu Command
The Service Configuration window (Figure 8-33) is partitioned into tabs (e.g. Default Trigger,
Screen List Edit) that represent the APmax applications supported by this interface. The Add and
Delete buttons at the bottom of each tab will be disabled if the associated application is not installed on this APmax system. The following sections describe each tab available in the Service
Configuration interface.
• Section 8.7.1 - "Default Trigger"
• Section 8.7.2 - "Screen List Edit"
• Section 8.7.3 - "Basic Conferencing"
8.7.1 Default Trigger
The Default Trigger tab (Figure 8-29) is used to manage the subsystem number (SSN) used by the
DefaultTriggerHandler package, which handles triggers not assigned to services.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-129Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
Figure 8-29 Default Trigger Tab
To configure the SSN, select the Default Trigger tab and press the Add button. An Add SSN win-
dow (see Figure 8-30) will be displayed. Enter an SSN value from 0 to 254, select an Event Type
(e.g. Tcap Query, Trigger), and press the OK button to complete the addition.
Figure 8-30 Add Default Trigger SSN
To remove the SSN from the Default Trigger tab, select the SSN and press the Delete button at the bottom of the tab.
8.7.2 Screen List Edit
The Screen List Edit tab (Figure 8-31) is used to manage the subsystem number (SSN) used by
Screen List Editing (SLE) services.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 8-31 Screen List Edit Tab
-130Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
To configure the SSN, select the Screen List Edit tab and press the Add button. An Add SSN win-
dow (see Figure 8-32) will be displayed. Enter an SSN value from 0 to 254, select an Event Type
(e.g. Tcap Response), and press the OK button.
Figure 8-32 Add Screen List Edit SSN
To remove the SSN from the Screen List Edit tab, select the SSN and press the Delete button at the bottom of the tab.
8.7.3 Basic Conferencing
The Basic Conferencing tab (Figure 8-33) is used to manage the 7 or 10-digit designated access
number that is dialed by Basic Conferencing Service users. See the Basic Conferencing Service
Description for more information about this service.
Figure 8-33 Basic Conferencing Tab
To configure the access number for this service, press the Add button at the bottom of the Basic
Conferencing tab. An Add DN window (see Figure 8-34) will be displayed. Enter a 7 or 10-digit
directory number, select an Event Type (e.g. Call Start), and press the OK button.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 8-34 Add DN
-131Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 8 - SS7 Configuration
To remove the Basic Conferecing Service access number, select the DN and press the Delete button at the bottom of the tab.
8.7.4 Remote IP
The Remote IP tab (Figure 8-35) is used to assign a trunk group to the Remote IP Service. See the
Remote IP Service Description for more information about this service.
Figure 8-35 Remote IP Tab
To assign a trunk group, select the Remote IP tab and press the Add button. An Add Trunk win-
dow (see Figure 8-36) will be displayed. Enter a trunk group number, select an Event Type (e.g.
Call Start), and press the OK button.
Figure 8-36 Add Trunk
To remove a Remote IP Service trunk group, select the trunk group and press the Delete button at the bottom of the tab.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-132Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure trunks connected to the APmax system. The trunk facilities, provided through the T1 circuits, are used by the APmax to provide voice services (e.g., announcements) or for routing calls in certain services.
Trunk groups are logical entities that provide an interface for telephone calls to be originated from or terminated to the APmax system. Each trunk group is associated with a specific protocol that indicates the mechanism that is used to signal the control of calls on the trunk group. Some of these protocols control circuit-switched calls (e.g., MF and ISUP protocols) and some protocols control packet-based/VoIP calls (e.g., SIP). Circuit-switched trunk groups also require associated physical hardware devices to carry the call audio. In these cases, the trunk group logically groups the hardware devices into members of the trunk group. In the APmax system, the hardware devices used to carry circuit-switched audio are T1 channels.
To access the Trunk Configuration interface in the APmax UI, right-click on the system’s icon
in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Config-
uration | Trunks | Trunk Configuration command (as illustrated in Figure 9-1). The name of the
system for which you are configuring ports will be displayed at the top of the Trunk Configura-
Figure 9-1 Trunk Configuration Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-133Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
Figure 9-2 Trunk Configuration Window
The Trunk Configuration window is partitioned into two sections: Trunk Groups and Trunk Group
Settings. The Trunk Groups section is on the left-hand side of the window and contains a list of the currently defined trunk groups, along with buttons for adding and deleting trunk groups. The
Trunk Group Settings section (see Section 9.1) is on the right-hand side of the window and is used
to manage the settings and trunk members of the trunk group currently selected in the Trunk
Groups section.
The following sections provide instructions for creating and configuring trunk groups based on the following signaling types: MF, ISUP, SIP, MGCP, Generic, and PRI.
• Section 9.2 - "MF Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.3 - "ISUP Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.4 - "SIP Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.5 - "MGCP Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.6 - "Generic Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.7 - "PRI Trunk Groups"
To delete a trunk group of any signaling type, select the trunk group in the list on the left-hand side of the Trunk Configuration window and press the Delete button located below the section. A
delete confirmation prompt (see Figure 9-3) will be displayed. Press the Yes button in the prompt
to complete the trunk group deletion or press the No button to cancel the deletion.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-134Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
Figure 9-3 Delete Confirmation Prompt
9.1 Trunk Group General Settings
The General Settings tab is located in the Trunk Group Settings section of the Trunk Configura-
tion window (see Figure 9-2) and shows all of the settings for the particular type of trunk group
that is currently selected in the Trunk Groups section of the window. Most of these settings are different depending on the signaling type of the trunk group, however, there are four properties
common to all signaling types. These properties are shown in Figure 9-4 and are described below.
Figure 9-4 General Settings Tab
Trunk Group
Signaling Type
The logical trunk group number whose settings are being displayed and modified. This setting can only be changed when a trunk group is being created.
The signaling type of the trunk group: MF, ISUP, SIP, Generic,
MGCP, or PRI. This setting can only be changed when a trunk group is being created.
Trunk Group Name
An optional descriptive name for the trunk group. Administrators can use this name to help identify the use and/or destination of this trunk group.
Direction
This field indicates the direction of call setup for this trunk group: Incoming, Outgoing, or 2-way.
Incoming trunk groups accept call origination from the switch at the far end of the trunks. Outgoing trunks can originate calls to the switch at the far end of the trunk. Trunk groups set to 2-way may accept and originate calls with the switch at the far end of the trunk.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-135Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
See the following sections to configure additional settings and trunk members for specific trunk group signaling types.
• Section 9.2 - "MF Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.3 - "ISUP Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.4 - "SIP Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.5 - "MGCP Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.6 - "Generic Trunk Groups"
• Section 9.7 - "PRI Trunk Groups"
9.2 MF Trunk Groups
9.2.1 Adding an MF Trunk Group
To add an MF trunk group, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the lower left-hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window
(Figure 9-2). An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9-5 will be displayed.
Figure 9-5 Enter MF Trunk Group Info
The four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are
2. Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group # field. The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown.
3. Select MF in the Signaling Type drop-down menu.
4. Enter the Trunk Group Name. This field is optional.
5. Select the direction of call setup for this trunk group.
6. Press the OK button to add the new MF trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the lefthand side of the Trunk Configuration window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-136Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
7. Configure additional settings (see Section 9.2.2) and trunk members (see Section 9.2.3)
for the new MF trunk group.
9.2.2 MF Trunk Group Settings
This section contains information on configuring settings specific to MF trunk groups. These settings are displayed in the General Settings tab of the Trunk Configuration window when an MF trunk group is selected in the list on the left-hand side of the window.
The four settings at the top of the General Settings tab are common to all types of trunk groups,
and are described in Section 9.1. At this time there is one setting specific to MF trunk groups:
Start Type. If this setting is not visible in the General Settings tab, click the tree symbol next to the Signalling Settings legend in the General Settings tab. The Start Type setting will be dis-
played, as illustrated in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6 MF Trunk Group General Settings
Use the Start Type pull-down menu to select the appropriate start-of-dialing signal used between the APmax and the far-end switch. This field may be set to one of the following values:
Wink
The APmax will return a wink back to the switch when an offhook is received. Digit collection will not begin until the wink has been returned.
Immediate
The APmax will not return a wink and will begin digit collection immediately after an off-hook is received.
9.2.3 MF Trunk Members
This section contains information on adding and removing trunk members (trunks) for MF trunk groups. Trunk members are viewed, added, and deleted from within the Trunk Members tab of the Trunk Configuration window. When an MF trunk group is selected in the list on the left-hand side of the window, all of the currently defined trunk members under the selected group will be
shown in this tab (see Figure 9-7).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-137Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
Figure 9-7 MF Trunk Members
The list in the Trunk Members tab shows the APmax Unit, T1, and channel of each trunk.
To delete trunk members from a trunk group, select the trunks you wish to remove in the list and press the Delete button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab. A delete confirmation prompt
will be displayed (see Figure 9-8). Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the deletion.
Figure 9-8 Delete Confirmation Prompt
New trunk members can be added to the selected trunk group by pressing the Add button at the
bottom of the Trunk Members tab. A window similar to Figure 9-9 will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-138Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
Figure 9-9 Add MF Trunk Members
The Select Trunk Member(s) to Add window contains two lists: Available Trunks and Selected
Trunks.
The Available Trunks list on the left side shows the T1 channels that are contained in DS1/DS3s
that have been enabled within the Digital Carrier Configuration interface (see Chapter 7 - "Digital
Carrier Configuration"), but have not been assigned to other trunk groups or services (e.g., used as
an SS7 link). The Selected Trunks list shows the T1 channels that will be assigned to the selected trunk group when the OK button is pressed.
Trunk members can be moved from the Available Trunks list to the Selected Trunks list by first selecting one or more available trunks and then press the Add >> button between the lists. Trunk members can be removed from the Selected Trunks list by selecting one or more trunks from the right-hand list and then pressing the << Remove button. The removed trunk members will be placed at the bottom of the Available Trunks list.
After the desired trunk members have been moved to the Selected Trunks list, press the OK button
to insert those trunk members into the Trunk Members tab (see Figure 9-7). Pressing the Cancel
button will close the Select Trunk Member(s) to Add window without adding any trunk members to the trunk group.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-139Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
9.3 ISUP Trunk Groups
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
9.3.1 Adding an ISUP Trunk Group
To add an ISUP trunk group, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the lower left-hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window
(Figure 9-2). An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9-10 (the Far-end
Name field is not initially shown) will be displayed.
Figure 9-10 Enter ISUP Trunk Group Info
The first four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are
2. Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group # field. The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown.
3. Select ISUP in the Signaling Type drop-down menu. The Far-end Name field will appear at the bottom of the window.
4. Enter the Trunk Group Name. This field is optional.
5. Select the direction of call setup for this trunk group.
6. From the pre-defined list in the Far-end Name drop-down menu, select the linkset or linkset route this trunk group uses to connect to the network element (normally a switch) at the immediate far end of the trunks in the trunk group. Since an ISUP trunk group can contain trunks that terminate at only one end point, this field identifies that far end network element.
If the linkset or route needed for this trunk group is not available in the drop-down menu, it can be added by pressing the button to the right of the Far-end Name field, which
will display the Add New Route window (see Figure 9-11).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-140Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
Figure 9-11 Add New Route
The Add New Route window has the following three fields:
Far End Point Code
Enter the SS7 address (signaling point code) of the switch at the far end this route will be used to reach.
Route Description
Enter a short description of the route.
Linkset To Use
Select the linkset that will be used to reach this far end point code from the drop-down list of linksets that have been defined
uration interface (see Section 8.2.1).
Pressing the OK button in the Add New Route window will add the route and return you to the Enter Trunk Group Info window. The newly added route will now be available in the
Far-end Name drop-down menu, and will also be listed in the Routes tab of the SS7 Con-
figuration interface (see Section 8.4 - "Linkset Route Management").
7. Press the OK button in the Enter Trunk Group window to add the new ISUP trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left-hand side of the Trunk Configuration window.
8. Configure additional settings (see Section 9.3.2) and trunk members (see Section 9.3.3)
for the new ISUP trunk group.
9.3.2 ISUP Trunk Group Settings
This section contains information on configuring settings specific to ISUP trunk groups. These settings are displayed in the General Settings tab of the Trunk Configuration window when an
ISUP trunk group is selected in the list on the left-hand side of the window.
The four settings at the top of the General Settings tab are common to all types of trunk groups,
and are described in Section 9.1. Beneath these settings are three group boxes: Far-end Settings,
Advanced Settings, and Continuity Tones. Next to the legend of each group box is a tree sym-
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-141Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration bol. Clicking a tree symbol will alternately show and hide the settings in the associated group
box. Figure 9-12 illustrates this portion of the General Settings tab when all of the settings are
displayed.
Figure 9-12 ISUP Trunk Group General Settings
The ISUP-specific trunk group settings are described below:
Far-end Name
The linkset or linkset route this trunk group uses to connect to the network element (normally a switch) at the immediate far end of the trunks in the trunk group. Since an ISUP trunk group can contain trunks that terminate at only one end point, this field identifies that far end network element.
The drop-down menu contains a list of linksets and linkset routes that have been defined in the SS7 Configuration inter-
face (see Chapter 8 - "SS7 Configuration").
If the desired far-end for this trunk group is not available in the drop-down menu, it can be added by pressing the button to the right of the Far-end Name field, which will display the Add
New Route window (see Figure 9-11). See Section 9.3.1 for
information about using the Add New Route window.
RLT
Use the pull-down menu to select a Release Link Trunking setting. Release Link Trunking allows the APmax to release facilities between the APmax and the switch and merge the remaining established portions of the call to eliminate the
APmax from the call path. Without this feature, two facilities between the switch and the APmax must be held during the entire call. This field may be set to one of the following values:
• None - Indicates the Release Link Trunking feature is turned off. This is the default value.
• EWSD - Turns the Release Link Trunking feature on for an
EWSD switch.
• DMS10 - Turns the Release Link Trunking feature on for a
DMS-10 switch.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-142Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Pick Order
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
This field is used to specify how a trunk will be selected within the trunk group for an outbound call. This field is only applicable to outgoing and 2-way trunk groups. For 2-way trunk groups it is important to select a pick order to minimize glare.
The order of ISUP trunks is based on CIC, while the order of analog trunks is based on T1 and channel number. For example, channel 1 on T1-0 is lower than channel 1 on T1-1. Channel 24 on T1-0 is lower than channel 1 on T1-1. Searches will span the T1 circuits to find an available trunk, but will not span units. Sequential searches will “wrap” to the appropriate T1 when upper or lower bounds have been reached. The options available for this field are listed below:
• Low - Starting with the lowest trunk in the trunk group, the first available trunk will be selected.
• High - Starting with the highest trunk in the trunk group, the first available trunk will be selected.
• Seq. Low - Low-Sequential. The last trunk used is stored.
Selection begins with the next highest trunk until an available trunk is found. The search “wraps” to the lowest trunk in the trunk group.
• Seq. High - High-Sequential. The last trunk used is stored.
Selection begins with the next lowest trunk until an available trunk is found. The search “wraps” to the highest trunk in the trunk group.
• Least Recent - When a trunk is used in a call a time stamp is created when the call is started. This option will select the trunk that has not been used in a call for the longest time.
• Most Recent - When a trunk is used in a call a time stamp is created on call start. This option will select the trunk that was most recently used in a call.
Hop Counter
This field indicates whether the Hop Count parameter, if present in an ISUP message, should be decremented. This action is only useful on incoming trunk groups and only when the APmax is an intermediate point, not the final destination, of a call. That is, if an incoming call is to be switched through the
APmax to an outgoing trunk, then the decrement hop count action is applicable. Options include Decrement and Don’t
Decrement, with Don’t Decrement being the default value.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-143Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Continuity Rate
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
This field indicates the number of calls that should be allowed between continuity checks on outbound calls. This field is only applicable to outgoing and 2-way trunk groups.
Options include None, Every, and different increment values from 5 to 100. Selecting None indicates that continuity is not to be performed on outbound calls. Selecting Every indicates that continuity is to be performed on every outbound call. The default value is Every.
Guard Time
Glare Control
This value, specified in milliseconds, is the time interval that an individual trunk must be idle before it can be selected for use on another call. This field is only applicable to outgoing and 2-way trunk groups. The default value is 768ms.
If the direction of call setup for this trunk group is set to 2-way, then this field is used to determine which end of the circuit will gain control if both ends simultaneously attempt to seize the circuit. The circuit that does not become the controlling end will attempt the call on another available circuit. Options for this field are listed below:
• None - The far end will be the controlling end for all instances of glare.
• UNC - Uncontrolled. This is the default value. The controlling end will be determined on a per-trunk basis following the rules outlined in GR-317.
• ALL - The APmax will be the controlling end for all instances of glare.
Confusion Message
This field indicates how the reception of unknown ISUP messages is to be handled. If this field is set to Send, then a Confusion message is returned to the originator of the unknown message. If this field is set to Don’t Send, then unknown messages are handled as stated in GR-317. The default setting is
Don’t Send.
In Receive Tone
Out Receive Tone
This field allows the inbound ISUP trunk receive continuity tone to be viewed and adjusted. The tone can be set to either 1780
Hz or 2010 Hz. The default inbound receive continuity tone is
1780 Hz.
This field allows the outbound ISUP trunk receive continuity tone to be viewed and adjusted. The tone can be set to either
1780 Hz or 2010 Hz. The default outbound receive continuity tone is 2010 Hz.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-144Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
In Transmit Tone
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
This field allows the inbound ISUP trunk transmit continuity tone to be viewed and adjusted. The tone can be set to either
1780 Hz or 2010 Hz. The default inbound transmit continuity tone is 2010 Hz.
Out Transmit Tone
This field allows the outbound ISUP trunk transmit continuity tone to be viewed and adjusted. The tone can be set to either
1780 Hz or 2010 Hz. The default outbound transmit continuity tone is 1780 Hz.
9.3.3 ISUP Trunk Members
This section contains information on adding and removing trunk members (trunks) for ISUP trunk groups. Trunk members are viewed, added, and deleted from within the Trunk Members tab of the Trunk Configuration window. When an ISUP trunk group is selected in the list on the lefthand side of the window, all of the currently defined trunk members under the selected group will
be shown in this tab (see Figure 9-13).
Figure 9-13 ISUP Trunk Members
The list in the Trunk Members tab shows each trunk and its APmax Unit, T1, channel, and assigned Circuit ID Code (CIC).
To delete trunk members from a trunk group, select the trunks you wish to remove in the list and press the Delete button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab. A delete confirmation prompt
will be displayed (see Figure 9-14). Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the deletion.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 9-14 Delete Confirmation Prompt
-145Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
New trunk members can be added to the selected trunk group by pressing the Add button at the
bottom of the Trunk Members tab. A window similar to Figure 9-15 will be displayed.
Figure 9-15 Add ISUP Trunk Members
The Select Trunk Member(s) to Add window contains two lists: Available Trunks and Selected
Trunks.
The Available Trunks list on the left side shows the T1 channels that are contained in DS1/DS3s
that have been enabled within the Digital Carrier Configuration interface (see Chapter 7 - "Digital
Carrier Configuration"), but have not been assigned to other trunk groups or services (e.g., used as
an SS7 link). The Selected Trunks list shows the T1 channels that will be assigned to the selected trunk group when the OK button is pressed.
Trunk members can be moved from the Available Trunks list to the Selected Trunks list by first selecting one or more available trunks and then press the Add >> button between the lists. A unique CIC number (unique within all trunk groups with the same far end point code) must identify every trunk member assigned to an ISUP trunk group. The CIC of each new ISUP trunk member can be assigned, after they are moved to the Selected Trunks list, by entering the CIC number into the trunk member’s row under the CIC column. To make this CIC assignment task easier, the Trunk Configuration interface has an “auto-populate” function. After a number is entered in an empty CIC cell, the APmax UI will populate all empty cells below the selected cell with CIC values incremented by one from the previously entered value. For example, if a CIC number of 100 is entered into the top row, the subsequent empty rows will be assigned 101, 102, etc.
Trunk members can be removed from the Selected Trunks list by selecting one or more trunks from the right-hand list and then pressing the << Remove button. The removed trunk members will be placed at the bottom of the Available Trunks list.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-146Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
After the desired trunk members have been moved to the Selected Trunks list, press the OK button
to insert those trunk members into the Trunk Members tab (see Figure 9-7). Pressing the Cancel
button will close the Select Trunk Member(s) to Add window without adding any trunk members to the trunk group.
9.4 SIP Trunk Groups
9.4.1 Adding a SIP Trunk Group
To add a SIP trunk group, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the lower left-hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window
(Figure 9-2). An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9-16 will be dis-
played.
Figure 9-16 Enter SIP Trunk Group Info
The four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are
2. Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group # field. The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown.
3. Select SIP in the Signaling Type drop-down menu.
4. Enter the Trunk Group Name. This field is optional.
5. Press the OK button to add the new SIP trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the lefthand side of the Trunk Configuration window.
6. Configure additional settings (see Section 9.4.2) for the new SIP trunk group.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-147Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
9.4.2 SIP Trunk Group Settings
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
This section contains information on configuring settings specific to SIP trunk groups. These settings are displayed in the General Settings tab of the Trunk Configuration window when a SIP trunk group is selected in the list on the left-hand side of the window.
The four settings at the top of the General Settings tab are common to all types of trunk groups,
and are described in Section 9.1. Beneath these settings is the SIP Trunk Group Settings group
box. Next to the legend of the group box is a tree symbol. Clicking a tree symbol will alter-
nately show and hide the settings in the group box. Figure 9-17 illustrates this portion of the Gen-
eral Settings tab when all of the settings are displayed.
Figure 9-17 SIP Trunk Group Settings
The SIP-specific trunk group settings are described below:
Proxy Address
This field is used to specify the SIP proxy server address of the switch and optionally the port (i.e., server:port). If left blank, the
Proxy Address functions as a “catch-all” trunk group, essentially bypassing security.
Load Balance
Tone Detection
This field indicates whether or not the unit receiving calls will redirect every other call to the mate unit to balance the load between the two units. This setting is applicable if the switch can only send calls to one IP address (typically the VRRP address of the APmax). Options include Yes or No, with No being the default value.
Use the pull-down menu to select the method of sending and receiving DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) tones. This field may be set to one of the following values:
• Automatic - The APmax listens for both in-band and out-ofband tones. In-band detection is turned off if any out-ofband tones are detected (to avoid double-digit detection).
• In-Band - The APmax tells the far side that out-of-band tone events are not supported, and to use in-band only.
• Negotiate - The APmax does what the far side indicates it can do. If the far side indiates out-of-band then the APmax will look for out-of-band tones. This is the default value.
Use Authentication
Indicates whether or not the APmax will challenge the caller to authenticate when a call comes in on the trunk group.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-148Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
9.5 MGCP Trunk Groups
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
9.5.1 Adding an MGCP Trunk Group
To add an MGCP trunk group, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the lower left-hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window
(Figure 9-2). An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9-18 will be dis-
played.
Figure 9-18 Enter MGCP Trunk Group Info
The four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are
2. Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group # field. The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown.
3. Select MGCP in the Signaling Type drop-down menu.
4. Enter the Trunk Group Name. This field is optional.
5. Select the direction of call setup for this trunk group.
6. Press the OK button to add the new MGCP trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left-hand side of the Trunk Configuration window.
7. Configure additional settings (see Section 9.5.2) for the new MGCP trunk group.
9.5.2 MGCP Trunk Group Settings
This section contains information on configuring settings specific to MGCP trunk groups. These settings are displayed in the General Settings tab of the Trunk Configuration window when an
MGCP trunk group is selected in the list on the left-hand side of the window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-149Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
The four settings at the top of the General Settings tab are common to all types of trunk groups,
and are described in Section 9.1. There is one setting specific to MGCP trunk groups: Destination
Address. If this setting is not visible in the General Settings tab, click the tree symbol next to the MGCP Settings legend in the General Settings tab. The Dest. Address setting will be dis-
played, as illustrated in Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 MGCP Trunk Group General Settings
The Dest. Address field is used to specify the MGCP destination server address (either an IP address or a host name), optionally followed by a port number (e.g. 192.168.1.5:2020).
9.6 Generic Trunk Groups
9.6.1 Adding a Generic Trunk Group
To add a Generic trunk group, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the lower left-hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window
(Figure 9-2). An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9-20 will be dis-
played.
Figure 9-20 Enter Generic Trunk Group Info
The four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are
2. Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group # field. The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown.
3. Select Generic in the Signaling Type drop-down menu.
4. Enter the Trunk Group Name. This field is optional.
5. Select the direction of call setup for this trunk group.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-150Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
6. Press the OK button to add the new Generic trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left-hand side of the Trunk Configuration window.
7. Configure trunk members (see Section 9.6.2) for the new Generic trunk group.
9.6.2 Generic Trunk Members
This section contains information on adding and removing trunk members (trunks) for Generic trunk groups. Trunk members are viewed, added, and deleted from within the Trunk Members tab of the Trunk Configuration window. When a Generic trunk group is selected in the list on the lefthand side of the window, all of the currently defined trunk members under the selected group will
be shown in this tab (see Figure 9-21).
Figure 9-21 Generic Trunk Members
The list in the Trunk Members tab shows the APmax Unit, T1, and channel of each trunk.
To delete trunk members from a trunk group, select the trunks you wish to remove in the list and press the Delete button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab. A delete confirmation prompt
will be displayed (see Figure 9-22). Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the deletion.
Figure 9-22 Delete Confirmation Prompt
New trunk members can be added to the selected trunk group by pressing the Add button at the
bottom of the Trunk Members tab. A window similar to Figure 9-23 will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-151Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
Figure 9-23 Add Generic Trunk Members
The Select Trunk Member(s) to Add window contains two lists: Available Trunks and Selected
Trunks.
The Available Trunks list on the left side shows the T1 channels that are contained in DS1/DS3s
that have been enabled within the Digital Carrier Configuration interface (see Chapter 7 - "Digital
Carrier Configuration"), but have not been assigned to other trunk groups or services (e.g., used as
an SS7 link). The Selected Trunks list shows the T1 channels that will be assigned to the selected trunk group when the OK button is pressed.
Trunk members can be moved from the Available Trunks list to the Selected Trunks list by first selecting one or more available trunks and then press the Add >> button between the lists. Trunk members can be removed from the Selected Trunks list by selecting one or more trunks from the right-hand list and then pressing the << Remove button. The removed trunk members will be placed at the bottom of the Available Trunks list.
After the desired trunk members have been moved to the Selected Trunks list, press the OK button
to insert those trunk members into the Trunk Members tab (see Figure 9-21). Pressing the Cancel
button will close the Select Trunk Member(s) to Add window without adding any trunk members to the trunk group.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-152Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
9.7 PRI Trunk Groups
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
9.7.1 Adding a PRI Trunk Group
To add a PRI trunk group, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the lower left-hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window
(Figure 9-2). An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9-24 will be dis-
played.
Figure 9-24 Enter PRI Trunk Group Info
The top four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are
2. Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group # field. The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown.
3. Select PRI in the Signaling Type drop-down menu.
4. Enter the Trunk Group Name. This field is optional.
5. The PRI Type setting is used to select the type of PRI switch associated with this trunk group.
6. Press the OK button to add the new PRI trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the lefthand side of the Trunk Configuration window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-153Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 9 - Trunk Configuration
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-154Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 10 - SIP Registration
Chapter 10 - SIP Registration
The SIP Registration interface is used for the following functions:
• Configuring SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) registrations, which allow users to register their current location, and therefore receive information at the registered location.
• Allowing SIP devices to register locally with the APmax. Calls made to and from these devices will not go through the phone switch, but will be handled directly between the
APmax and the device.
The SIP Registration interface (see Figure 10-2) for an APmax system is accessed by right-click-
ing on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and
then selecting the System Configuration | SIP Registration command (as illustrated in Figure 10-
Figure 10-1 SIP Registration Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 10-2 SIP Registration Window
-155Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 10 - SIP Registration
The SIP Registration window is partitioned into two tabs: Client and Server. The Client tab is used to configure SIP registrations and is divided into Registration and Settings tabs. The Regis-
tration tab is for managing SIP registration entries, and the Settings tab is for configuring systemwide SIP registration properties. The Server tab is used to manage the devices that are allowed to register locally with the APmax.
The functions available in these tabs are described in the following sections:
• Registration tab - Section 10.1 - "SIP Client Registration Management"
• Settings tab - Section 10.2 - "SIP Client Registration Settings"
• Server tab - Section 10.3 - "SIP Server Management"
10.1 SIP Client Registration Management
When the SIP Registration interface is opened, the Registration tab is displayed by default (see
have already been defined. Selecting a registration entry in the left-hand list will display the details of that entry in the SIP Registration Info on the right-hand side of the tab.
To edit an existing registration entry, select that entry in the SIP Registrations list, click the property you wish to edit in the SIP Registration Info section, and enter the new value.
To add a new SIP registration, press the Add button located below the SIP Registrations list in the
Registration tab of the SIP Registration window. A window similar to Figure 10-3 will be dis-
played.
Figure 10-3 Add New SIP Registration Window
The settings in the Add New SIP Registration window are described below:
User
Enter the username of the registration. The combination of user and registrar (user@registrar) must be unique for each SIP registration. Entering a combination that already exists will overwrite the existing entry.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-156Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Registrar
Chapter 10 - SIP Registration
Enter the domain where the registration is to be sent.
Port
Password
The port the SIP registration will use.
Enter the password required for authentication when registering.
Expires
The number of seconds before the SIP registration expires.
Populate the fields in the Add New SIP Registration window and press the OK button to add the registration, or press the Cancel button to exit without adding a new registration. The new registration entry will be immediately displayed in the SIP Registrations list.
To delete a SIP registration, select the entry in the list on the left-hand side of the Registration tab in the SIP Registration window and press the Delete button located below the list.
10.2 SIP Client Registration Settings
Select the Settings tab (see Figure 10-4) in the SIP Registration window to view and configure
system-wide SIP registration properties.
Figure 10-4 SIP Registration Settings
The SIP Settings section of the Settings tab contains the properties described below:
Proxy Address
The SIP proxy address to be used by the system.
Keep Alive Timer
Listen Port
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
The number of seconds between “keep alive” messages.
The port the system uses to listen for SIP messages. The default and recommended port number is 5060.
-157Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 10 - SIP Registration
The SIP Strip Off Digits section of the Settings tab is used to manage the list of leading digits that will be removed from called, calling, redirecting and original call party numbers. For example, if an entry is found in the SIP Strip Off Digits section for Digit Length of 12 and SIP Strip Off of +1, and a 12-digit number such as +16059956120 is received by the switch, then the number will be changed to 6059956120 before being sent to a service.
To add a set of SIP strip off digits, press the Add button located at the bottom of the SIP Strip Off
Digits section. An Add SIP Strip Off window similar to Figure 10-5 will be displayed.
Figure 10-5 Add SIP Strip Off
Enter into the Digit Length field the number of phone number digits that will be looked for when determining if leading digits should be stripped off. Enter the exact digits (including ‘+’ if necessary) to be removed in the Strip Off field, and then press the OK button to complete the addition.
To delete an entry from the SIP Strip Off Digits list, select the entry and press the Delete button.
Close the SIP Registration window to save any changes to the properties.
10.3 SIP Server Management
The Server tab (see Figure 10-6) in the SIP Registration interface is used to manage SIP devices
that can register locally with the APmax. Calls made to and from these devices will be handled directly by the APmax.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 10-6 SIP Registration Server Management
-158Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 10 - SIP Registration
The Server tab is divided into two sections: Realms and Realm Members. The Realms section on the left-hand side of the tab is used to create realms (groups) for SIP devices and assign a SIP trunk group to each realm. Selecting a realm on the left-hand side will display the devices in that realm in the Realm Members section on the right-hand side of the tab. Instructions for adding and deleting realms and realm members are given in the following sections.
10.3.1 Realm Management
To add a SIP Registration realm, press the Add button located below the Realms section in the
Server tab. An Add SIP Server Realm entry form similar to Figure 10-7 will be displayed.
Figure 10-7 Add SIP Server Realm
Enter a description of the new realm in the Realm Name field, select the outgoing SIP Trunk
Group to use for calls for this realm, and press the OK button. Note that only outgoing or 2-way
SIP trunk groups that have been previously configured in the Trunk Configuration interface (see
Section 9.4 - "SIP Trunk Groups") for the current APmax system will be available in the Add SIP
Server Realm entry form.
To delete a realm and its members, select the realm and press the Delete button below the Realms section. A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed. Choose Yes to complete the deletion.
10.3.2 Realm Member Management
Follow these steps to add a SIP Registration realm member:
1. Select in the Realms section on the left-hand side of the Server tab the realm to which the new member should be added.
2. Press the Add button located below the Realm Members section in the Server tab. An Add
SIP Server Realm Member entry form similar to Figure 10-8 will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 10-8 Add SIP Server Realm Member
-159Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 10 - SIP Registration
3. Enter the username (typically a phone number) into the User field.
4. Enter the Password associated with the new member. This field may be left blank, but for security reasons a blank password is not recommended.
5. Press the OK button to complete the addition of the realm member. The username of the new member will be displayed in the Realm Members section along with the following columns of information:
Address
IP address or domain of the device.
Port
Expires
Port of the SIP device. This value will be displayed if it is set to a value other than 5060.
When the device registration expires.
To delete a realm member, select the member and press the Delete button below the Realm Mem-
bers section. A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed. Choose Yes to complete the deletion.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-160Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
APmax systems provide the ability for end user subscribers to control and configure enhanced services provided by Innovative Systems over the Internet. This chapter describes how to configure administrative Internet Access Settings (e.g. service provider settings, e-mail server settings, password restrictions) for APmax systems.
End user subscriber access to enhanced services is provided by the web-browser-based Web Portal Service. Before they can manage enhanced services with the Web Portal Service, subscribers
Instructions for configuring Web Portal Service administrative settings are found in Section 11.2
of this chapter. The Web Portal Service is an enhanced APmax service that must be installed separately on APmax systems. For more information on the Web Portal Service, see the documentation that is packaged with the service.
Some data transfers between the APmax and other servers or applications may require Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) communications. Instructions for requesting and installing an SSL certifi-
cate on the APmax are given in Section 11.4 of this chapter.
To access the Internet Access Settings interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the
Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Configuration | Internet
Access Settings command (as illustrated in Figure 11-1). The name of the system for which you
Figure 11-1 Internet Access Settings Menu Command
The Internet Access Settings window is partitioned into six tabs: General (Figure 11-2), Web Por-
tal (Figure 11-3), Password Management (Figure 11-22), SSL Setup (Figure 11-23), Administra-
tive Users (Figure 11-28), and External DSP Addresses (Figure 11-31). The settings and
functions in these tabs are described in the following sections.
• Section 11.1 - "General Internet Access Settings"
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-161Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
• Section 11.3 - "Password Management"
• Section 11.5 - "Administrative Users"
• Section 11.6 - "External DSP Addresses"
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
11.1 General Internet Access Settings
The General tab (Figure 11-2) is displayed by default when the Internet Access Settings interface
is accessed. This tab contains the service provider settings and e-mail server settings that must be configured before APmax features that use the Internet will function properly.
Figure 11-2 General Tab
The General tab contains the following properties:
Service Provider ID
The unique ID assigned to this service provider. This ID is generated automatically by the system.
External Address
The IP address or domain name that someone on the Internet would use to access this service provider.
A description of the service provider.
Service Provider
Name
Support Address
Technical support URL that will be displayed in iPhone applications.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-162Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Support E-Mail
Address
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Technical support e-mail address that will be displayed in iPhone applications.
Administrator E-Mail
Address
The e-mail address that will receive administrative messages.
Multiple addresses separated by a semi-colon may be entered into this field.
Default From Address
The e-mail address that will be displayed as the source for any e-mail messages leaving the system.
SMTP Server
The SMTP server address. This is the address of an SMTP server you are allowed to send mail through.
Close the Internet Access Settings window to save any changes to the properties.
11.2 Web Portal
The Web Portal tab (see Figure 11-3 or Figure 11-7) provides an interface for configuring Web
Portal Service administrative settings. The Web Portal Service is an enhanced APmax service that must be installed separately on APmax systems. For more information on the Web Portal
Service, see the documentation that is packaged with the service.
The APmax Root Web Address setting at the top of the Web Portal tab is described below. All
other settings are partitioned into the Silverlight (Section 11.2.1) and HTML (Section 11.2.2) tabs.
APmax Root Web
Address
This setting is used to determine whether or not Internet Access-enabled subscribers can access the Web Portal Service login page by navigating their web browser directly to the External Address defined in the General tab
(see Section 11.1). Options are as follows:
• Default - The login page is only accessible by navigating to “http://<Exter-
nal Address>/Portal/PortalPage.html” where “<External Address>” is the
IP address or domain name defined in the General tab (see Section 11.1).
This option should be primarily used for test purposes when the service provider does not want the login page to be exactly the same as the Exter-
nal Address.
• Portal - The Web Portal Service login page is accessible by navigating directly to the External Address, or “http://<External Address>/Portal/PortalPage.html.” This is the recommended option for allowing subscribers easy access to the Web Portal Service login page.
• StreamingTV - The StreamingTV Service web page is the default web page. This option requires the following minimum package versions to be installed on the APmax system: Web Portal 6.0.8 and StreamingTV
2.0.14. See the StreamingTV Service Description for more information.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-163Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
11.2.1 Silverlight
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
The Silverlight tab is used to configure the Call History setting (described below Figure 11-3) and
to manage the portals configured for this APmax system. Each portal has its own branding and
HTML.
Figure 11-3 Web Portal - Silverlight Tab
The following setting is found at the top of the Silverlight tab:
Call History
Set to Enabled to log call information for integrated Web Portal Service subscribers (see the Web Portal Service Description for more information on integrated subscribers).
WARNING: This setting is Disabled by default because it is extremely resource intensive. Also, after enabling this service it may be necessary to clear the browser cache before real-time call logging will function properly.
11.2.1.1 Adding a Portal
NOTE: APmax Release 4.2 or greater is required for additional portals to be configured. Earlier
APmax releases will be limited to the default “Portal” entry.
Press the Add button to display the Portal Configuration window (Figure 11-4).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-164Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Figure 11-4 Portal Configuration (Add)
The settings in the Portal Configuration window are described below. Complete these settings and press the OK button to add the portal.
Portal Name
Top Banner PNG
Used in conjunction with the External Address to access the login page of the web portal. Users access the login page by navigating to “http://
<External Address>/<Portal Name>” where <External Address> is the IP
address or domain name defined in the General tab (see Section 11.1)
and <Portal Name> is the value of this field.
Web Portal Service interfaces that are viewed by service end users include a banner that typically displays the logo or name of their service provider. The graphic used for this banner must be in a computer file of the format PNG (Portable Network Graphics).
When editing an existing portal configuration the banner graphic that is currently being displayed to subscribers can be viewed by pressing the
service provider is the fictional company ABC Telecom.
To change the banner being displayed to subscribers, press the New button. This will open a standard file selection window which will allow a new
PNG file to be selected. Once the file is selected, it will be displayed in the
Web Portal Banner window. Press the OK button in the Web Portal Banner window to accept the new banner or press Cancel to exit without updating the banner.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 11-5 Web Portal Banner
-165Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Portal HTML
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
The HTML file that defines the entryway to the Web Portal Service interface can be viewed and customized by pressing the Edit button in the Por-
tal HTML section of the Web Portal tab, which will display a Web Portal
HTML window populated with the current HTML. After any changes are made, press the OK button in the Web Portal HTML window to display a save prompt, and then press the Yes button in the prompt to apply the changes, or the No button to close the window and discard all changes.
When editing an existing portal configuration, the factory default Portal
HTML file that was installed with the APmax system can be restored by pressing the Restore button. This will display a warning message. Press the Yes button in the warning to overwrite the existing custom Portal
HTML file with the default file, or press the No button to cancel the restore.
11.2.1.2 Editing a Portal
The settings of the selected portal may be viewed or changed by pressing the Edit button, which
displays the Portal Configuration window shown in Figure 11-6. The portal settings in this win-
dow are described above in Section 11.2.1.1.
Figure 11-6 Portal Configuration (Edit)
11.2.1.3 Deleting a Portal
To delete a portal configuration, select the portal in the Portal Name list and press the Delete button below the list. A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed. Choose Yes in the prompt to remove the portal.
Note: The default “Portal” entry cannot be deleted.
11.2.2 HTML Tab
The HTML tab (Figure 11-7) is used to enter the generated keys that are required by service pro-
viders such as Facebook or Google to verify the login request is coming from the correct location.
The Login Provider column in the HTML tab lists the providers supported by the APmax and the
Login Provider Key contains the text cells where the associated keys must be entered.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-166Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Figure 11-7 Web Portal - HTML Tab
Instructions for obtaining service provider keys are found in the following sections:
• Google - Section 11.2.2.1 - "Obtaining a Google Provider Key"
• Facebook - Section 11.2.2.2 - "Obtaining a Facebook Provider Key"
11.2.2.1 Obtaining a Google Provider Key
An account with Google is necessary to obtain a login provider key from Google. If you have a
Google Account for development purposes then please have the account login and password available prior to beginning this procedure. If you do not have a Google Account then one can be created at the beginning of the procedure.
Note: Actual screens and interfaces may vary slightly from those shown in this procedure, depending on the browser used and changes made by Google to the Google Developer Console.
1. Go to https://console.developers.google.com
to open the Google Developer Console and to begin creating a project.
• If you are not logged in to a Google Account then the Google login page will be displayed. Login to continue.
• If a Google Account needs to be created then use the Create an account link in the login page to create an account, and then press the Get started button in the “welcome” screen.
2. Start creating a project by selecting the Create a project menu command (shown in Figure
11-8) or by clicking the Create an empty project option or the Create Project button. The
“New Project” screen (Figure 11-9) will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-167Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Figure 11-8 Create a Project
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Figure 11-9 New Project
3. Complete the “New Project” screen (Figure 11-9) and press the Create button. The
Google Developers Console will take a few moments to create the project.
4. Click on the APIs & auth category to expand it and select the Credentials option, as illus-
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-168Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Figure 11-10 Credentials
5. Press the Create new Client ID button to display the “Create Client ID” screen (Figure 11-
Figure 11-11 Create Client ID
6. Select the Web application option in the “Create Client ID” screen and press the Configure
consent screen button to display the “Consent screen” seen in Figure 11-12.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-169Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Figure 11-12 Consent screen
7. Specify an Email address and enter a Product name in the “Consent screen” and then press
the Save button. The “Create Client ID” screen will be displayed again (Figure 11-13).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-170Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Figure 11-13 Enter Origin URL
8. Enter the origin URL into the Authorized JavaScript origins field of the “Create Client
ID” screen, and press the Create Client ID button.
9. The Google+ API needs to be enabled. If it is already enabled then go to Step 11. To
locate the Google+ API, click on the APIs & auth category to expand it, select the APIs
option (as illustrated in Figure 11-14), and find the Google+ API link. Figure 11-14 shows
the Google+ API link under the “Social APIs” section of the “Popular APIs.”
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-171Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Figure 11-14 Find the Google+ API
10. Click the Google+ API link to show the Enable API button (see Figure 11-15) and press
the button.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 11-15 Enable the Google+ API
-172Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
11. Click on the APIs & auth category and select the Credentials option. This will show the
Client ID for the web application, as illustrated in Figure 11-16.
Figure 11-16 Get the Client ID
12. Select the Client ID value and copy it.
13. Go to the Internet Access Settings interface, Web Portal tab, HTML tab (Figure 11-7), and
paste the Client ID value into the Login Provider Key cell next to Google. Close the Internet Access Settings interface to save the key value.
11.2.2.2 Obtaining a Facebook Provider Key
A personal developer account with Facebook is necessary to obtain a login provider key from
Facebook. If you have a non-developer Facebook account that you wish to use for development purposes then it will have to be converted into a developer account. This process is explained in the procedure.
Note: Actual screens and interfaces may vary slightly from those shown in this procedure, depending on the browser used and changes made by Facebook to the developer interface.
1. Go to https://developers.facebook.com
. If you are logged in then continue to Step 2.
• If you are not logged into a Facebook account, or you need to create an account, then click on Log In in the upper right-hand corner of the Facebook developer page. The login page will be displayed. Log into an existing account or choose Sign up for Face-
book to create a Facebook account, and then go back to https://developers.facebook.com
.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-173Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
2. Move the mouse pointer over My Apps at the top of the screen to show one of the drop-
down menus seen in Figure 11-17. If the menu option says “Register as a Developer” then
click on it, complete the registration, and continue to the next step. If the menu option says “Add a New App” then click on it and continue.
Figure 11-17 My Apps Menu Options
Figure 11-18 Add a New App
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 11-19 Enter Project Description
-174Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
4. Enter a description in the “Quick Start for Website” screen (Figure 11-19) and press the
Create New Facebook App ID button. The “Create a New App ID” screen (Figure 11-20)
will be shown.
Figure 11-20 Create a New App ID
5. Choose a Category and press the Create App ID button. A screen similar to Figure 11-21
will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-175Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Figure 11-21 Setup the Facebook SDK
6. Select the appId value and copy it. Do not close the web browser.
7. Go to the Internet Access Settings interface, Web Portal tab, HTML tab (Figure 11-7), and
paste the appId value into the Login Provider Key cell next to Facebook. Close the Internet Access Settings interface to save the key value.
8. Go back to the web browser and enter the Site URL where the web page will be hosted
(e.g., iptv.innovsys.com) and press the Next button.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-176Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
11.3 Password Management
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
The Password Management tab (Figure 11-22) is used to enforce system-wide restrictions on
passwords used by Internet Access-enabled subscribers to login to Web Portal Service interfaces.
Figure 11-22 Password Management Tab
The Password Management tab contains the following properties:
Minimum Password
Strength
The minimum strength required for all new Internet Access passwords. Password strength is determined by number of characters, type of characters (uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers, symbols), and whether or not the password includes common words found in the internal dictionary. The four levels of password strength are described below:
• Weak - Any password that is not Medium, Strong, or Best.
• Medium - Any password with 8 or more characters that has at least two different types of characters and does not directly match words in the internal dictionary.
• Strong - Any password with 8 or more characters that has at least three different types of characters and does not match any variation of a word in the internal dictionary.
• Best - Any password with 14 or more characters that has at least three different types of characters and does not match any variation of a word in the internal dictionary.
Default Password
The default password (20 characters maximum) that will be assigned to new Internet Access subscriber accounts.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-177Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Enable Lockout
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Check this box to lock individual Internet Access accounts if the specified Maximum Failed Login Attempts value has been reached for the account. Subscribers with locked accounts will not be able to login to Web Portal until their account has been
manually unlocked (see Section 26.1.4 - "Subscriber Internet
Access Settings") or the Failed Login Lockout Time has been
reached.
Uncheck this box to disable the lockout feature for this system.
This box is unchecked by default.
Maximum Failed
Login Attempts
Number of failed login attempts a user is allowed before the associated Internet Access account is locked for the specified
Failed Login Lockout Time or until it is manually unlocked (see
Section 26.1.4 - "Subscriber Internet Access Settings").
Failed Login Lockout
Time (min)
The time in minutes an account will remain locked once the specified Maximum Failed Login Attempts value has been reached.
Max Account Inactivity Time (days)
The maximum number of days that may pass without the subscriber logging in before the account will be locked because of inactivity. The account will remain locked until it is manually
unlocked by a customer service representative (see Section
26.1.4 - "Subscriber Internet Access Settings").
The default value is 0, which indicates this feature is disabled and no subscribers will be locked out because of inactivity.
Close the Internet Access Settings window to save any changes to the properties.
11.4 SSL Setup
Some data transfers between the APmax and other servers or applications may require Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) communications. This mechanism will require that a certificate be purchased and installed on the APmax system. This certificate must be purchased from a certificate authority that provides certificates in the PEM, CRT, or PFX file format.
NOTES:
• CRT and PFX formats require APmax Release 4.3.90 or greater.
• If the certificate is a CRT/PEM file with text content, but the file name ends with a CRT extension, and it has “-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----” and “-----END CERTIFICATE-----” in it, then it must be renamed to have a PEM extension before being installed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-178Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
The purpose of the SSL Setup tab (Figure 11-23) in the Internet Access Settings interface is to
make the steps of requesting and installing a server certificate easier. These steps are given below:
1. Open the Internet Access Settings interface as described at the beginning of Chapter 11
and select the SSL Setup tab, as illustrated below.
Figure 11-23 SSL Setup Tab
2. If there is currently a working certificate that is being updated via this procedure then press the Backup button to save the existing certificate as a local file. The backup file is a
.pem file with all information (private key, main certificate, intermediate certificate) in the correct order.
3. Enter a keyword into the Pass Phrase field, select a Key Length of either 1024 or 2048 bit
(depending on the requirement of the certificate provider), and press the Generate button in the Private Key section of the SSL Setup tab. This will create a unique key and save it
on the APmax (see Figure 11-24). This key is used when requesting a certificate and must
match the key on the certificate file that is installed.
WARNING: After generating a private key, do not press the Generate button in the Pri-
vate Key section again until the requested certificate file is received and installed, otherwise the private key on the APmax will not match the key in the certificate.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 11-24 Private Key Generated
-179Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
4. The Generate button in the Certificate Signing Request section should now be enabled.
Press it to display the Certificate Signing Request form (see Figure 11-25).
Figure 11-25 Certificate Signing Request Form
5. Fill out the following fields in the Certificate Signing Request form:
Country
Input the 2-letter abbreviation of the country where the
APmax is located. For example: CA for Canada or US for the United States of America.
State or Province
Locality
Input the full name of the state or province where the APmax is located. Do not abbreviate the state or province name.
Input the full name of the city where the APmax is located.
Do not abbreviate the city or locality name.
Organization Name
Input the name under which your organization or company is legally registered.
Organization Unit
Input your organizational unit or department, such as Telephony, Operations, or IT. If applicable, you can enter the
DBA (doing business as) name in this field.
Common Name
E-Mail Address
Enter the fully-qualified domain name that resolves to the
APmax (e.g, “www.myinnovsysapmax.com”). Do not include the “http://” or “https://” prefixes.
Enter the e-mail address of the person responsible for this certificate or APmax system. This is usually how the Certificate Authority contacts you.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-180Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
6. Press the Save button at the bottom of the Certificate Signing Request form. A standard
Save As window will be displayed. Enter the file name and press the Save button to create the CSR request file. After it is saved the file will be opened and the contents will be dis-
played, as show in Figure 11-26.
Figure 11-26 Certificate Signing Request Information
7. Submit the CSR request file to a certificate authority online (i.e., VeriSign). They will generate a PEM, CRT, or PFX certificate response file, which contains your public key and is digitally signed by the certificate authority. When the response file is received, continue to the next step. NOTE: If the certificate is a CRT/PEM file with text content, but the file name ends with a CRT extension, and it has “-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----” and
“-----END CERTIFICATE-----” in it, then it must be renamed to have a PEM extension before being installed.
8. Install the signed certificate file(s). This is done by clicking the New button at the bottom of the Internet Access Settings window to display a standard Open window, selecting one or more certificate response files (NOTE: Multiple PEM and CRT files may be selected), and pressing the Open button. If the certificate contains a private key then a password
prompt (Figure 11-27) will be given.
Figure 11-27 Enter Certificate Password
9. The certificate is now installed on the APmax system. The details of the installed certificate can be viewed by pressing the Current button in the SSL Setup tab, but no further action is necessary to install the certificate on the APmax.
10. Press the Backup button to save the newly installed certificate as a local file. The backup file is a .pem file with all information (private key, main certificate, intermediate certificate) in the correct order and can be installed on another server or APmax.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-181Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
11.5 Administrative Users
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
The Administrative Users tab (Figure 11-28) provides an interface for managing user accounts
that have administrative access to the provisioning API. Administrative access provides a login for third-party provision systems. An administrative user can provision the settings of any subscriber, whereas as a subscriber with a normal Internet Access account can only access their own settings.
Figure 11-28 Administrative Users Tab
Instructions for adding, editing, and deleting administrative users are given below.
11.5.1 Adding a User
To define a new administrative user, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the Administrative Users tab. An Administrative User window
similar to Figure 11-29 will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 11-29 Administrative User Window
-182Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
2. Populate the following fields in the Administrative User window:
Username
The name of this Internet Access account. This name must be unique among subscribers associated with the same
Internet Access service provider.
Password
The password of this Internet Access account. This password is used in conjunction with the Username to allow the subscriber to have administrative access to the provisioning
API.
Description
A short description of this account.
3. Press the OK button in the Administrative User window. The new user has now been created and will be displayed in the list of users in the Administrative Users tab.
11.5.2 Editing a User
To modify the settings (Username, Password, Description) of an existing administrative user,
select the user in the Administrative Users tab (see Figure 11-28) and press the Edit button. An
Administrative User window (see Figure 11-29) populated with the current settings of the selected
user will be displayed. Make any desired changes to the settings and press the OK button to save the changes.
11.5.3 Deleting a User
To delete an administrative user, select the user in the Administrative Users tab (see Figure 11-28)
and press the Delete button. A delete confirmation prompt (Figure 11-30) will be displayed.
Select the Yes button to complete the deletion.
Figure 11-30 Delete User Prompt
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-183Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
11.6 External DSP Addresses
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Note: The External DSP Addresses interface is only available for APmax systems with either the SysConfig package installed, or APmax Release 4.3 or greater.
The External DSP Addresses tab (Figure 11-31) is used to manage the list of domain names and
IP addresses that can be used by Internet and mobile device applications to query APmax system information from DSPs on the APmax.
Figure 11-31 External DSP Addresses Tab
To configure a new external DSP address, follow these steps:
1. Press the Add button in the External DSP Addresses tab. An External DSP entry window
similar to Figure 11-32 will be displayed.
Figure 11-32 External DSP Entry Window
2. Populate the following fields in the External DSP window:
Address
Enter the IP address or domain name that someone on the
Internet would use to access this DSP.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-184Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Unit
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Select or enter the number of the APmax unit with the DSP.
DSP
Select or enter a DSP number from 0 to 3.
3. Press the OK button. The external DSP address has now been created and will be displayed in the External DSP Addresses tab.
To remove an external DSP address, select the address entry and press the Delete button. A confirmation prompt will be displayed. Choose Yes in the prompt to complete the deletion.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-185Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 11 - Internet Access Settings
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-186Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 12 - Phone Number Format
Chapter 12 - Phone Number Format
The Phone Number Format interface provides the following functions:
• Formatting the playback of phone numbers in announcements (see Section 12.1).
• Configuring the length of phone number addresses that are automatically added to the
APmax system when a new subscriber record is created (see Section 12.2).
The Phone Number Format interface is accessed by right-clicking on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and then selecting the System Configura-
tion | Phone Number Format command (as illustrated in Figure 12-1). The name of the system
for which you are configuring settings will be displayed at the top of the Phone Number Format
Figure 12-1 Phone Number Format Menu Command
The Phone Number Format window is partitioned into two tabs: Format Settings (Figure 12-2)
and Subscriber Settings (Figure 12-5). The settings and functions in these tabs are described
below.
• Section 12.1 - "Format Settings"
• Section 12.2 - "Subscriber Settings"
12.1 Format Settings
The Format Settings tab (Figure 12-2) is used to format the playback of phone numbers in
announcements.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-187Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 12 - Phone Number Format
Figure 12-2 Format Settings Tab
The left-hand side of the tab contains a list of the phone number lengths (e.g. 7-digit, 10-digit, 11digit) which have already been formatted for this system. Additional phone number lengths can be formatted by pressing the Add button below the list to display the Add Number Format win-
dow (Figure 12-3), filling out the fields described below, and pressing the OK button.
Digit Length
Enter a phone number length from 5 to 24 digits.
Display Format
Use the letter d (indicating a digit) and dashes to format the phone number.
Digits in the phone number are voiced with either a normal voice or an ending inflection, depending on where they are located in the format. Dashes in the format will result in a pause in the phone number announcement. For example, if the Digit Length is 10 then a possible format would be ddd-ddd-
dddd, with the 3rd, 6th, and 10th digits having an ending inflection, the remaining digits being voiced normally, and the dashes resulting in two inter-digit pauses.
Figure 12-3 Add Number Format
Selecting a phone number length in the left-hand list of the Format Settings tab will show the Dis-
play Format and Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers of the selected length in the right-hand
side of the tab. The Display Format field (described above Figure 12-3) allows the initially
defined format of the selected phone number length to be edited.
The Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers list is used to set up a priority queue for matching phone numbers that come in on a trunk. Entries in this list are referred to as “routing numbers” and indicate the number of digits (from 1 to 10) that need to be matched before routing occurs.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-188Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 12 - Phone Number Format
For example, if the routing numbers 7, 6, and 3 are in the list then routing will occur on the first 7 digits of the incoming phone number if a match is found. However, if a match is not found then an attempt will be made to route on the first 6 digits and, if a match is still not found, an attempt will be made to route on the first 3 digits.
To add a routing number, press the Add button below the Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers
list. A window similar to Figure 12-4 will be displayed. Enter a routing number from 1 to 10 and
press the OK button to complete the entry.
Figure 12-4 Add Trunk Routing Configuration Number
Numbers in the Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers list can be moved up and down in the priority queue by selecting the row of the number and pressing the up or down arrow buttons on the right-hand side of the list.
12.2 Subscriber Settings
The Subscriber Settings tab (Figure 12-5) is used to configure the length (number of digits) of the
phone number addresses that are automatically added to the APmax system when a new subscriber record is created. For example, if entries for 7 and 10 are in the Subscriber Settings tab, and a new subscriber with the phone number 605-555-1000 is added to the APmax, then a 7-digit phone number address of 555-1000 would also be added to the system for the new subscriber record.
Note: An address length of 10 digits will be automatically configured for non-international
APmax systems and cannot be deleted from the Subscriber Settings tab.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 12-5 Subscriber Settings Tab
-189Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 12 - Phone Number Format
To add a new default subscriber address length to the system, press the Add button in the Sub-
scriber Settings tab. An entry form similar to Figure 12-6 will be displayed. Enter a number of
digits from 5 to 10 and press the OK button to complete the entry.
Figure 12-6 Add Subscriber Address Length
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-190Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Part 3 - System
Maintenance
Overview
Part 3 provides instructions for maintaining the APmax hardware and using the system mainte-
nance functions that are included in the APmax UI software.
The following chapters are found in System Maintenance:
• Chapter 13 - "Hardware Maintenance"
• Chapter 14 - "Announcement Manager"
• Chapter 15 - "FTP Transfer Service"
• Chapter 16 - "Package Management"
• Chapter 17 - "Report Viewer"
• Chapter 18 - "System Upgrade Manager"
WARNING:
The functions described below allow direct manipulation of the APmax through access to APmax commands and through access to files stored on the APmax’s disk. These functions should not be used except under the direction of vendor technical support personnel. Before using these functions, you must completely understand what actions to perform and the consequences of those actions. Any mistakes made using these functions could have serious ramifications. If there is an APmax UI function available to perform the desired APmax modification, it is very strongly recommended that the APmax UI function be used to update the APmax rather than these direct access methods.
• Command Line - Provides access to the APmax command line where APmax commands can be entered and the response displayed.
• Diagnostics - Used to collect detailed information (logs, statistics, core files, etc.) from one or more APmax units. The information is then archived and can be used by vendor technical support personnel.
• File Viewer - Allows the display and manipulation of files stored on the APmax’s disk. It also provides disk usage information.
• Process Viewer - Monitors the CPU usage of processes running on each unit of the APmax system.
• Reboot Utility - Used to perform the following actions for each APmax unit: Restart the
Administration CPU, restart the Call Processing CPU, restart all DSPs, Shutdown.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-191Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
To access the maintenance interfaces for an APmax system, right-click on the system’s icon
in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu. Select the System Mainte-
nance command to expand the popup menu, as illustrated in the figure below. The expanded menu will display all of the available maintenance interfaces for this system. Select a command from the expanded menu to display the associated interface.
System Maintenance Menu
NOTE: The name of the APmax system for which maintenance is being performed will be displayed in the caption of any window that is opened using the System
Maintenance command. If the system name that is displayed in the caption is not the system you want to configure, then close the window and right-click on the icon of the system you want to configure.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-192Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
APmax system hardware may periodically require maintenance. The procedures in this chapter provide step-by-step instructions for performing the following maintenance functions:
• Cleaning Air Vents (Section 13.1)
• Fan Replacement (Section 13.2)
13.1 Cleaning Air Vents
The APmax system contains eight (four per unit) air vents. The following instructions describe how to properly clean these air vents. Complete this process once every six months or when other central office equipment has a similar maintenance procedure performed.
13.1.1 Remove Vent Cover
Remove the vent cover using needle-nose pliers (or a similar instrument). Simply grab part of the
vent cover and pull (see Figure 13-1).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-193Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
Figure 13-1 Remove Vent Cover
13.1.2 Remove Foam Padding
Once the vent cover has been removed, remove the foam padding behind it using the same instrument.
Pinch the padding and pull it back (see Figure 13-2).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-194Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
Figure 13-2 Remove Foam Padding
13.1.3 Remove Dust From Foam Padding
Blow on the foam padding or use compressed air to remove any dust. Reverse the steps to finish the process, and then repeat these steps for the remaining air vents.
13.2 Fan Replacement
CAUTION – The APmax contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Please follow Telephone Equipment
ESD abatement procedures when handling equipment.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-195Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
13.2.1 Recommended Tools
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
• #2 Philips head screwdriver (for power and alarm wiring, loosen/tighten brackets on chassis, cover)
• 1/8” slot (flat) head screwdriver (to remove/install connectors on screwlocks)
• 5/16” socket/nut driver (to remove/install APmax unit on rack)
• Small (4” or 6”) long nose locking pliers (remove/install fans)
• #1 Phillips head screwdriver (remove/install fans)
13.2.2 Fan Replacement Procedure
When looking at the APmax from the Front View, the fans are numbered from left to right. The
corresponding power connectors are shown in Figure 13-4.
Figure 13-3 APmax Front
1. Power down the unit that needs to be repaired.
2. Record and tag all cables and wires connected to the repair unit.
3. Disconnect cables and wires.
4. Remove the unit from the rack.
a. Remove the Hex screws that secure the APmax brackets to the rack.
5. Bench the unit with the Front Panel facing technician.
a. Loosen the screws that secure the brackets to the APmax (5 per bracket).
b. Remove the two screws in the back on the unit to remove top cover.
c. Slide the top cover towards the back of the unit. Remove cover.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-196Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
Figure 13-4
6. Remove fan from unit.
a. Remove the fan wiring from the motherboard by pulling upward on the corresponding brown connector.
b. Clip off connector with as much wire as possible to ease the removal of the old wire.
c.
Note: The fan wires are taped to the casing underneath the motherboard. Use precaution when pulling from under the board.
Pull horizontally (not upward) when removing old wires. Once fan wires are free, clip off remaining wire up to fan and discard.
Note: If for some reason the wire does not want to pull free with reasonable force, it will not cause any problems if it is left in place. Simply cut off the old wire that is visible and leave the rest.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-197Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
Figure 13-5
d. Use a long-nose locking plier or other small plier to hold a locking nut while using a
#1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the corresponding screw from the outside of the unit. Repeat to remove remaining screws.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 13-6
-198Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
Figure 13-7
e. Save and collect hardware from the fan so that you can reuse it with the new fan (This includes the outside fan filter assembly. These will be used with the new fans.)
Note: Once removed, this would be a good time to blow out/clean the fan filter.
f.
Replace single fan or desired number of fans.
Note: It is highly recommended that when a unit is taken out of service in order to replace a faulty fan, that all four fans be replaced in the unit. If fans were also shipped for the mate unit, they may be replaced at your convenience or when that unit displays a fan alarm.
7. Install the new fan.
a. With the “Cofan” fan label visible from the inside of the unit and with fan wires exiting from either the right side or left side of the fan (depending on which fan is being
replaced, see Figure 13-6), place the new fan so that the screw holes align with holes
in enclosure.
b. Next, align the fan filter assembly on the outside of the enclosure and insert the 4 screws (make sure the filter retainer is facing outward).
c. Secure the 4 nylon lock nuts to the screws. Do not overtighten.
d. Connect fan wires to board (see Figure 13-8).
e. Loop fan wires and secure with cable tie (single fan or two adjacent fans). See Figure
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-199Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
Figure 13-8
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 13-9
-200Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance f.
Slide cover back into place and secure with screws in the back of the unit.
8. Tighten the screws that secure the brackets to the APmax (5 per bracket).
9. Install the unit back into the rack.
10. Connect cables and wires.
11. Return power to unit.
12. Clear the alarms using the APmax UI (see Chapter 19 - "Alarm Status") after the unit has
finished booting up.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-201Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 13 - Hardware Maintenance
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-202Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
The Announcement Manager interface in the APmax UI allows new announcements and phrases to be created, and also allows existing announcements and phrases to be modified.
To access the Announcement Manager interface, right-click on an APmax system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Maintenance |
Announcement Manager command (as illustrated in Figure 14-1). The name of the system for
which you are managing announcements will be displayed at the top of the Announcement Man-
Figure 14-1 Announcement Manager Menu Command
The Announcement Manager window is partitioned into two tabs: Announcements (Figure 14-2)
and Phrases (Figure 14-21). The settings and functions in these tabs are described in the follow-
ing sections:
• Section 14.1 - "Announcements"
• Section 14.2 - "Phrase Management"
14.1 Announcements
The Announcements tab (Figure 14-2) is displayed by default when the Announcement Manager
interface is accessed. This tab contains a table of the announcement sets that are currently deployed to this APmax system. On the left-hand side of each announcement set row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to display or hide the announcements in the set. For example, in
Figure 14-2 the “Std-Class” announcement set is expanded to display all of the STD/CLASS
announcements on the system. A vertical scrollbar will be displayed on the right-hand side of the window if the announcement sets and announcements create a table longer than can be shown in the Announcement Manager window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-203Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Figure 14-2 Announcements Tab
The following columns of information about each announcement will be displayed when a set row is expanded.
Number
The announcement number. This number is unique within this announcement set.
Language
Voice
Version
Description
Custom
The language (e.g. English, Spanish, TTY) that is used to voice the announcement.
The voice used in the announcement (e.g. female, female_2).
The version number of the announcement.
Descriptive text used to help identify the announcement.
Is this a custom announcement? True or False. Custom announcements are announcements that have been added or edited after the announcement set was deployed to the APmax system.
The list of announcements can be sorted by clicking on any of the column headings described above. The functions of the Add, Edit, Copy and Original buttons located at the bottom of the
Announcements tab are described in the following sections:
• Section 14.1.1 - "Adding Announcements"
• Section 14.1.2 - "Editing Announcements"
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-204Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
• Section 14.1.3 - "Copying Announcements"
• Section 14.1.6 - "Restoring Original Announcements"
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
14.1.1 Adding Announcements
The Announcement Manager provides an interface for creating new announcements by concate-
nating phrases (see Section 14.1.4.1 - "Phrase Components") and information components (see
Section 14.1.4.3 - "Information Components").
New announcements can only be added to switch announcement sets. Follow these steps to create an announcement:
1. Select the switch announcement set row (e.g. Std-Class) in the Announcements tab and
press the Add button. The Add Announcement window (Figure 14-3) will be displayed.
Figure 14-3 Add Announcement Window
2. Enter text into the Announcement Description field that will help identify the announcement within the APmax UI.
3. Choose in the Type selection box the component to be added, either Phrase or Information.
4. Press the Add button. An Add Phrase window will be displayed. The fields in the window will depend on the type of component that is being added. For more information on add-
ing phrases see Section 14.1.4.1 and for more information on adding information compo-
5. Fill out the fields in the Add Phrase window and press the Insert button to add the component to the announcement.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-205Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
6. Repeat the three previous steps until all of the desired components have been added to the new announcement. Unwanted components can be deleted by selecting the component in the Announcement Text section and pressing the Delete button.
7. Press the Test button and listen to the announcement to verify the components of the
announcement are playing correctly. See Section 14.1.5 - "Testing Announcements" for
more information. When finished, close the Test Announcement window.
8. When the announcement is satisfactory, press the OK button in the Add Announcement window. A prompt to close the window and save the announcement will be displayed (see
Figure 14-4 Save Announcement Prompt
9. Press OK in the Save Announcement prompt to continue. The Announcement Number
prompt (see Figure 14-5) will be displayed.
Figure 14-5 Announcement Number Prompt
10. Enter the number from 1 to 65535 that will be used to identify the new announcement, and press the OK button. The new announcement will now be listed in the switch announcement set.
14.1.2 Editing Announcements
The Announcement Manager allows the following changes to be made to existing announcements:
• The announcement description can be edited.
• Phrases (see Section 14.1.4.1 - "Phrase Components") can be added or deleted.
• Information components (see Section 14.1.4.3 - "Information Components") can be added,
deleted, or have their Information Sub-Type and Logical Station properties changed.
Announcements in any announcement set can be edited. Follow these steps to edit an announcement:
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-206Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
1. In the Announcements tab, expand the announcement set row containing the announcement to be edited.
2. Select the announcement to edit and press the Edit button. An Edit Announcement win-
dow similar to Figure 14-6 will be displayed. The contents of the selected announcement
will be shown in the window.
Figure 14-6 Edit Announcement Window
3. Make the desired changes. Options include:
• Change the text in the Announcement Description field. This text is used to help identify the announcement within the APmax UI.
• Use the Add button to add components to the announcement. For more information on
adding phrases see Section 14.1.4.1, and for more information on adding information
components see Section 14.1.4.3.
• Remove unwanted components by selecting them in the Announcement Text section and pressing the Delete button or the Delete key on the keyboard.
4. Press the Test button and listen to the announcement to verify the components of the
announcement are playing correctly. See Section 14.1.5 - "Testing Announcements" for
more information. When finished, close the Test Announcement window.
5. When the announcement is satisfactory, press the OK button in the Edit Announcement window to save the changes. Alternatively, all changes can be discarded by pressing the
Cancel button. If the OK button is pressed, a prompt to close the window and save the
announcement will be displayed (see Figure 14-7).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-207Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Figure 14-7 Save Announcement Prompt
6. Press OK in the Save Announcement prompt to confirm the save.
14.1.3 Copying Announcements
Any announcement in a switch announcement set (e.g Std-Class) can be copied to create a new announcement based on the existing announcement. Follow these steps to copy an announcement:
1. In the Announcements tab, expand the switch announcement set row containing the announcement to be copied.
2. Select the announcement to copy and press the Copy button. A Copy Announcement win-
dow similar to Figure 14-8 will be displayed. The contents of the selected announcement
will be shown in the window.
Figure 14-8 Copy Announcement Window
3. Make any desired changes. Options include:
• Change the text in the Announcement Description field. This text is used to help identify the announcement within the APmax UI.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-208Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
• Use the Add button to add components to the announcement. For more information on
adding phrases see Section 14.1.4.1, and for more information on adding information
components see Section 14.1.4.3.
• Remove unwanted components by selecting them in the Announcement Text section and pressing the Delete button.
4. Press the Test button and listen to the announcement to verify the components of the
announcement are playing correctly. See Section 14.1.5 - "Testing Announcements" for
more information. When finished, close the Test Announcement window.
5. When the announcement is satisfactory, press the OK button in the Copy Announcement window to save the changes. Alternatively, the new announcement can be discarded by pressing the Cancel button. If the OK button is pressed, a prompt to close the window and
save the announcement will be displayed (see Figure 14-9).
Figure 14-9 Save Announcement Prompt
6. Press OK in the Save Announcement prompt to continue. The Announcement Number
prompt (see Figure 14-10) will be displayed.
Figure 14-10 Announcement Number Prompt
7. Enter the number from 1 to 65535 that will be used to identify the new announcement, and press the OK button. The new announcement will now be listed in the switch announcement set.
14.1.4 Announcement Components
Announcements are comprised of one or more of the following types of components: Phrase,
Parameter, Information, and Built In. These components are concatenated together to form the announcement. Descriptions of each type of announcement component are given below.
• Section 14.1.4.1 - "Phrase Components"
• Section 14.1.4.2 - "Parameter Components"
• Section 14.1.4.3 - "Information Components"
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-209Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
• Section 14.1.4.4 - "Built In Components"
14.1.4.1 Phrase Components
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Announcement phrase components are pre-recorded audio clips that voice pre-defined letters, numbers, words, tones, or silence each time the announcement is played. These phrases may be simple, one-word phrases such as “and” or they may be multi-word phrases such as “the number you have dialed.” Some phrases are periods of silence which can be used to create pauses, result-
ing in a more natural-sounding announcement. See Section 14.2 - "Phrase Management" for
information on creating new phrases.
An announcement with multiple phrase components is shown in Figure 14-11.
Figure 14-11 Phrase Component Properties
Selecting a phrase in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement window or Edit
Announcement window (illustrated in Figure 14-11) will display the details of the phrase in the
Selected Phrase Properties section of the window. Phrase properties in the Announcement Text
section are read-only and are described below Figure 14-12.
Phrases can be added or deleted from new or existing announcements. To add a phrase to an announcement, select Phrase in the Type selection box of the Add Announcement or Edit
Announcement windows (see Figure 14-11) and press the Add button. An Add Phrase window
similar to Figure 14-12 will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-210Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Figure 14-12 Add a Phrase Component
The Add Phrase window for phrase components contains the following fields.
Type
The type of component (Phrase or Information) that is being added to the announcement. Select the Phrase option if it is not already selected.
Language
Voice
Phrases
The language (e.g. English, Spanish, TTY) that is used to voice the phrase.
The voice used in the phrase (e.g. female, female_2).
The phrase that will be added to the announcement. Only phrases that meet the selected Language and Voice criteria will be available.
Click in this field to display a drop-down list of available phrases and select
the desired phrase, as illustrated in Figure 14-13. The drop-down list can be
sorted by clicking on the Phrase Text column heading. Also, typing while the drop-down list is displayed will filter the list to show only phrases beginning with the entered text.
Figure 14-13 Phrases Drop-down List
Populate the fields in the Add Phrase window and press the Insert button to add the phrase component to the announcement.
To delete a phrase component from an announcement, select the phrase in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement or Edit Announcement window and press the Delete button.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-211Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
14.1.4.2 Parameter Components
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Parameters are the parts of an announcement that are variable. That is, parameters in an announcement may say different things each time the announcement is played. For example, if an announcement plays the current time, such as “The current time is [CurrentTime],” then the [CurrentTime] portion of the announcement is variable because it changes with the time of day.
Therefore [CurrentTime] would be a parameter in the announcement.
Selecting a parameter in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement window or
Edit Announcement window (illustrated in Figure 14-14) will display the details of the parameter
in the Selected Parameter Properties section of the window.
Figure 14-14 Parameter Component Properties
Parameters are only found in factory-defined announcements and cannot be added or deleted, but the values of the Language, Voice, and Phrase properties may be changed. These properties are described below:
Language
The language (e.g. English, Spanish, TTY) that is used to voice the parameter.
Voice
The voice used in the parameter (e.g. female, female_2).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-212Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Phrase
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
The phrase that will be voiced. Only phrases that meet the selected Lan-
guage and Voice criteria will be available.
Click in this field to display a drop-down list of available phrases and select the desired phrase. The drop-down list can be sorted by clicking on the
Fragment heading. Also, typing while the drop-down list is displayed will filter the list to show only phrases beginning with the entered text.
Press the OK button when all changes are completed to save the changes and close the Edit
Announcement window.
14.1.4.3 Information Components
Announcement information components are used in conjunction with the APmax Weather Plus
Service (see the Weather Plus Service Description for more information) to play current weather readings from weather stations or current date and time. Consequently, an information component in an announcement may say different things each time the announcement is played. For example, if the {OutsideTemp1} information component is supposed to give the outside temperature from logical weather station 1, then the {OutsideTemp1} portion of the announcement will change depending on the current temperature at logical weather station 1.
An announcement with multiple information components is shown in Figure 14-15.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 14-15 Information Component Properties
-213Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Selecting an information component in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement
window or Edit Announcement window (illustrated in Figure 14-15) will display the details of the
information component in the Selected Information Properties section of the window. The prop-
erties shown in the Selected Information Properties section are described below Figure 14-16. Of
these properties, only the Information Sub-Type and Logical Station values can be changed.
Information components can be added or deleted from new or existing announcements. To add an information component to an announcement, select Information in the Type selection box of the
Add Announcement or Edit Announcement windows (see Figure 14-15) and press the Add button.
An Add Phrase window similar to Figure 14-16 will be displayed.
Figure 14-16 Add an Information Component
The Add Phrase window for information components contains the following fields.
Type
(of component)
The type of component (Phrase or Information) that is being added to the announcement. Select the Information option if it is not already selected.
Language
Voice
Type
(of information)
Sub Type
Station
The language (e.g. English, Spanish, TTY) that is used to voice the component.
The voice used in the component (e.g. female, female_2).
The type of information component. Options include: Barometric Pressure,
Barometric Trend, Daily Rain, Dew Point, Heat Index, Inside Humidity,
Inside Temp, Outside Humidity, Outside Temp, Total Rain, UV Index, Wind
Chill, Wind Direction, Wind Gust, Wind Speed, Time, and Date.
The unit of measurement used for this information component. Unit options may include Default (the standard sub-type for this type of information component, as defined by the announcement service), Imperial, and Metric units, and also Time and Date formats when appropriate.
The number (1 to 8) of the logical weather station this information component will use to find its value.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-214Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Description
The name of this information component. This name will be used to identify this information component in the Add Announcement and Edit Announcement interfaces.
Populate the fields in the Add Phrase window and press the Insert button to add the information component to the announcement.
To delete an information component from an announcement, select the information component in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement or Edit Announcement window and press the Delete button.
In addition to changing property values, conditions may be defined for information components by selecting the component and pressing the add condition button in the upper left-hand corner of the Selected Information Properties section. When a condition is added, an expand symbol
will appear on the left-hand side of the component’s row in the Selected Information Properties section. Expanding the row will display the conditions for the selected component (illustrated in
Figure 14-15). Each condition row contains the type of condition, a Value column, and a Value2
column. The necessity of entering a number into the Value2 column depends on the type of condition. Conditions types that may be defined include Always, Equal, Not Equal, Less Than,
Greater Than, Less Than Equal, Greater Than Equal, Range Equal, Range Not Equal, Invalid, and
Other. Figure 14-15 illustrates a TotalRain information component with a condition that the
TotalRain value be greater than zero.
Note: The Barometric Trend information component does not support conditions.
To remove a condition from an information component, select the condition row in the Selected
Information Properties section and press the delete condition button.
Each condition of an information component may have one or more actions associated with it.
Use the expand symbol on the left-hand side of a condition row to view the actions defined for the condition. The add action button can be used if more than one action is necessary for a condition. The move action up and move action down buttons are used to rearrange the order in which the actions take place.
Changes to property values and conditions will be saved when the OK button is pressed.
14.1.4.4 Built In Components
Components that are “Built In” perform custom announcement operations that cannot be created using standard phrase, parameter, or information components. This type of component can be deleted from an announcement, but cannot be added using the Announcement Manager. If a built in component is inadvertently deleted and the announcement is saved, the component will have to
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-215Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
be restored by using the Original button in the Announcements tab (see Section 14.1.6 - "Restor-
ing Original Announcements"). An announcement with a built in component is shown in Figure
Figure 14-17 Built In Component Properties
14.1.5 Testing Announcements
The Test Announcement interface (see Figure 14-18) is used to listen to announcements through
PC speakers to verify the components of the announcements are playing correctly. The Test
Announcement interface is accessed by pressing the Test button within the Add Announcement
window (see Section 14.1.1 - "Adding Announcements") or Edit Announcement window (see
Section 14.1.2 - "Editing Announcements").
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 14-18 Test Announcement Window
-216Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
When the Test Announcement window is opened, any parameters or information components in the announcement will be listed in the Announcement Input Values section of the window. This section contains a table with the following three fields for each component:
Item
The name of the parameter or information component. Types of parameters and information components may include silence, strings of digits,
date and time, weather station readings, etc. See Table 14-1 - "Sample
Test Input Value Formats" for examples. This field is read-only.
Input Value
Announcement
Enter the value to be used for testing this item. For example, if a parameter would typically be a 10-digit phone number, then click in this field and enter a 10-digit number that would adequately test the announce-
ment. See Table 14-1 - "Sample Test Input Value Formats" for exam-
ples of input value formats.
The phrase text that will be played when this item is reached during the playing of the announcement. This field is read-only and is dependent on the combination of item and input value. For example, if the item is
“{WindDirectionStation5}” and the input value is “11” then this field will be “West South West.”
The Announcement Text section at the bottom of the Test Announcement window displays the entire contents of the announcement including the results of the input values currently entered for any parameters or information components in the Announcement Input Values section. The text in this section will be updated whenever an input value is changed.
Pressing the Play button at the bottom of the window will play the test announcement through your PC speakers if your PC has wave audio sound capabilities. Pressing the Stop button or closing the Test Announcement window will discontinue the playing of the test announcement.
Table 14-1 Sample Test Input Value Formats
Item Type
Silence
Day/Current Day of the Week
Month
Year
Date
ISO Date
Number
Format
x to xxxxx (depending on the maximum number of seconds specified in the parameter definition)
0-6 (Sunday - Saturday)
0-11 (January - December)
xxxx (where x is 0-9)
mmdd yyyymmdd
x (where x is 0-n, and n is a max number value specified in the parameter definition)
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-217Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Item Type
Digits
Variable Digits
Directory Number
Time (12 hour)
Time (24 hour)
Timestamp12
Timestamp23
Inside/Outside Temperature
Wind Speed
Wind Gust
Wind Direction
Barometric Pressure
Barometric Trend
Inside/Outside Humidity
Total/Daily Rainfall
Wind Chill
Dew Point
Heat Index
UV Index
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Format
x (where x is a string of n digits, and n is a number specified in the parameter definition)
x (where x is a string of 0 to n digits, and n is a number specified in the parameter definition)
String of 10 digits.
HHMM (HH: 00-23)(“AM” phrase will be played if
HH is less than 12, and “PM” if HH is 12 or greater)
HHMM (HH: 00-23)(“AM” and “PM” phrases will not be played)
yyyymmddHHMM (HH: 00-23)(“AM” phrase will be played if HH is less than 12, and “PM” if HH is
12 or greater)
yyyymmddHHMM (HH: 00-23)(“AM” and “PM” phrases will not be played)
+/- xxx (where x is 0-9)
xxx (where x is 0-9)
xxx (where x is 0-9)
0-15 (North - North North West)
xx.xx (where x is 0-9)
0-2 (Steady, Rising, Falling)
xxx (where x is 0-9)
xx.xx (where x is 0-9)
+/- xxx (where x is 0-9)
+/- xxx (where x is 0-9)
+/- xxx (where x is 0-9)
+/- xxx (where x is 0-9)
14.1.6 Restoring Original Announcements
There are two types of custom announcements: new announcements that were not originally
deployed with an announcement set (see Section 14.1.1 - "Adding Announcements"), and
announcements that came with an announcement set but were edited (Section 14.1.2 - "Editing
Announcements"). A custom announcement can be reverted to its original state by selecting the
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-218Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager announcement in the Announcements tab table and pressing the Original button located below the table. The Original button will not be enabled if the selected announcement is not a custom announcement.
Restoring a custom announcement that was not originally part of an announcement set will delete the announcement from the system since there is no original version to restore. Attempting to do
this will result in the warning prompt shown in Figure 14-19. Pressing the Yes button in the
prompt will complete the deletion.
Figure 14-19 Delete Announcement Warning
Restoring an edited announcement that was deployed with an announcement set will remove all changes from the edited announcement and return it to its original, non-customized state.
Attempting to do this will result in the warning prompt shown in Figure 14-20. Pressing the Yes
button in the prompt will revert the selected announcement.
Figure 14-20 Revert Announcement Warning
14.2 Phrase Management
Announcement phrases are .wav audio files that can be used to create announcements for the
APmax. For more information on using phrases with announcements, see the following sections:
• Section 14.1.1 - "Adding Announcements"
• Section 14.1.2 - "Editing Announcements"
• Section 14.1.4.1 - "Phrase Components"
The Phrases tab (see Figure 14-21) allows you to manage custom phrases (i.e., phrases that you
have created) and to listen to all pre-defined phrases that were deployed with announcement sets.
The following functions can be performed within the Phrases tab:
• Play all phrases on your PC speakers.
• Find all announcements that are using a phrase.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-219Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
• Add custom phrases (see Section 14.2.1).
• Delete custom phrases (see Section 14.2.2).
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Figure 14-21 Phrases Tab
The Phrases tab contains a list with the following columns of information about each phrase on the APmax:
Language
The language (e.g. English, Spanish, TTY) that is used to voice the phrase.
Voice
Inflection
The voice used in the phrase (e.g. female, female_2).
Whether or not there is an inflection at the end of the phrase. Phrases with ending inflections sound more natural when played at the end of an announcement sentence.
WAV File
Phrase Text
Custom
The name of the phrase audio file on the APmax. All phrase files are of the .wav format.
Descriptive text used to help identify the phrase when using it with announcements. This text would typically be the word(s) that will be voiced by the phrase.
Is this a custom phrase? True or False. Custom phrases are those that have been added manually and were not deployed with an APmax package.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-220Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Selecting a phrase and pressing the Play button at the bottom of the Phrases tab will play the selected phrase through your PC speakers if your PC has wave audio sound capabilities.
The Find button at the bottom of the Phrases tab is used to discover if any announcements are using a phrase. To use this function, select a phrase and press the Find button. If the phrase is
currently being used by one or more announcements, a form similar to Figure 14-22 will be dis-
played, listing the details of the announcements using the phrase.
Figure 14-22 Phrase In Use
The Add and Delete buttons in the Phrases tab are described in the following sections:
• Section 14.2.1 - "Adding Custom Phrases"
• Section 14.2.2 - "Deleting Custom Phrases"
14.2.1 Adding Custom Phrases
The Announcement Manager provides an interface for creating new phrases by importing Microsoft WAV-formatted audio files from an outside source onto the APmax system. The following table lists the .wav file encodings that are supported by Announcement Manager and the APmax.
Unsigned 8-bit PCM
Signed 32-bit PCM u-law encoding
MS ADPCM
Signed 16-bit PCM
32-bit float
A-law encoding
GSM 6.10
Signed 24-bit PCM
64-bit double
IMA ADPCM
G721 ADPCM 32kbps
Follow these steps to add a custom phrase:
1. Press the Add button at the bottom of the Phrases tab in the Announcement Manager win-
dow. An Enter Phrase Information window similar to Figure 14-23 will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-221Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Figure 14-23 Enter Phrase Information Window
2. Choose the language of the new phrase in the Language selection box. If the desired language has not been defined it may be added by pressing the button next to the Lan-
guage selection box, which will display an Add window similar to Figure 14-24. Enter
the new language and the initial voice of the new language set into the Add window and press the OK button to continue.
Figure 14-24 Adding a New Language
3. Choose the voice of the new phrase in the Voice selection box. The options in the Voice selection box will depend on the voices that have already been defined for the selected language. If the desired voice is not available for the selected language, it may be added by pressing the button next to Voice selection box, which will display an Add window
similar to Figure 14-25. Enter the new voice into the Add window and press the OK but-
ton to continue.
Figure 14-25 Adding a New Voice
4. Press the folder button next to the WAV File field to open a standard file selection window. Use the file selection window to locate and select the .wav audio file that will be used in the new phrase and press the Open button. The path to the selected .wav file will be displayed in the WAV File field.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-222Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
5. Enter into the Text field descriptive text that will help identify the phrase in the APmax UI.
This text would typically be the word(s) that will be spoken when the phrase is played in an announcement.
6. If the phrase has an ending inflection, then choose Ending in the Inflection selection box, otherwise leave the value as None.
7. Press the OK button. The specified .wav audio file will be transferred to the APmax and the new phrase will now be available to be added to announcements.
14.2.2 Deleting Custom Phrases
Custom phrases can be deleted from the APmax by selecting the phrase in the Phrases tab and
pressing the Delete button at the bottom of the tab. A delete confirmation prompt (see Figure 14-
26) will be displayed. Press the Yes button in the prompt to continue the deletion or No to cancel
the deletion.
Figure 14-26 Delete Confirmation Prompt
If the selected phrase is being used by one or more announcements, an error message (see Figure
14-27) will be displayed and the phrase will not be deleted. The announcements using the phrase
can be found by pressing the Find button at the bottom of the Phrases tab.
Figure 14-27 Phrase in Use Error
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-223Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 14 - Announcement Manager
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-224Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 15 - FTP Transfer Service
Chapter 15 - FTP Transfer Service
15.1 FTP Transfer Service
The APmax provides a common FTP service for archiving voice files, logs, and other files. It supports a number of options and can be used to automatically archive files from the APmax to an
FTP server. The user interface described in this chapter is used to configure file transfer tasks on the APmax FTP service.
Note: The FTP Transfer Service requires the FTPUtilityService package to be installed on the selected system.
To access the FTP Transfer Service interface, right-click on the APmax system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Maintenance | FTP
Transfer Service command (as illustrated in Figure 15-1). An FTP Transfer Service window sim-
ilar to Figure 15-2 will be displayed.
Figure 15-1 FTP Transfer Service Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-225Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 15 - FTP Transfer Service
Figure 15-2 FTP Transfer Service Window
The left-hand side of the FTP Transfer Service window contains a list of tasks that have been previously configured. Selecting a task in this list will display its settings in the FTP Task Properties table on the right-hand side of the window.
New FTP tasks can be created by pressing the Add button to display the Add FTP Task entry form
(Figure 15-3), entering the required task and FTP server settings (described below Figure 15-3),
and pressing the OK button. Settings in the Add FTP Task form, with the exception of Applica-
tion Name and Description, can be edited in the FTP Task Properties table after the task is added.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 15-3 Add FTP Task
-226Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 15 - FTP Transfer Service
The task and server settings found in the Add FTP Task and FTP Transfer Service windows are described in the table below.
Task Properties
Application Name
Name of the application requesting the FTP. This setting cannot be edited after the task is created.
Description
Description of the FTP transfer. This setting cannot be edited after the task is created.
Source Directory
Include Subdirectories
Starting directory for transfers.
Whether or not to walk subdirectories. Yes or No.
Transfer Schedule
Frequency between FTP transfers. Options include: One Time, Hourly, or Daily.
Transfer Start
Time
Time of day when the FTP transfer will begin.
File Inclusion
Mask
File Exclusion
Mask
Regular expression of files in the directory to include in the transfer. If blank then all files in the directory will be transferred.
Regular expression of files in the directory that will not be transferred.
This expression takes precedence over the File Inclusion Mask. If blank then no files will be excluded.
Directory Exclusion Mask
Regular expression of directory names not to transfer. If blank then all subdirectories will be transferred. This setting is useful when the
Include Subdirectories option is set to Yes.
Press this button to immediately run this FTP transfer task.
FTP Server Properties
IP or URL address of the FTP server where files will be sent.
FTP Server
Address
FTP Server Port
User Name
Password
FTP Type
Passive Mode
Port number of the FTP server.
Username to login to the FTP server.
Password to login to the FTP server.
The type of FTP protocol to use. Options include:
• Normal
• FTPS Secure
• SFTP Secure
Choose Passive or Active FTP. The default is Passive.
Press this button to test the connection to the entered FTP server.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-227Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
15.2 FTP Client Backup
Chapter 15 - FTP Transfer Service
This section provides general instructions for using a third-party FTP clients to backup APmax databases. These steps may need to be adapted to fit the user interface of your FTP client.
1. Open an FTP connection to an APmax unit by using the following information:
Host
Username
Password
Port
Administration IP address of an APmax unit.
ftpdownload ftp9download12
21
2. Once logged in, navigate to the backup directory: /ap/databases/backups
3. The backups folder will have three folders named MMDDYY (month day year), which contain backup copies of the database. Copy the most recent MMDDYY folder from the
APmax to your local or network drive.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-228Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Chapter 16 - Package Management
16.1 Package Management Interface
APmax packages contain the tables and files necessary to provision features for APmax systems.
When a package is deployed, the contents of the package are copied to the appropriate locations on the system. The Package Management interface is used to deploy packages to a system, remove packages from a system, and view the contents of packages.
To access the Package Management interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the
Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Maintenance | Package
Figure 16-1 Package Management Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 16-2 Package Management Window
-229Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
The Package Management window contains a list of installed packages and the current version of each installed package. The Hide “License Only” Packages checkbox in the upper right-hand corner of the window is checked by default to hide packages installed only to upgrade the number of service licenses. The buttons located below the list are used to deploy packages to a system, remove packages from a system, and view the contents of deployed packages. They are described below:
Install
Press this button to begin the process of deploying a package.
See Section 16.1.1 for more information.
Remove
Properties
Press this button to delete the selected package from the sys-
tem. See Section 16.1.2 for more information.
Press this button to view the contents of the selected installed
package. See Section 16.1.3 for more information.
16.1.1 Deploying a Package
To install a new or updated feature on an APmax system, a package containing the new tables and files must be deployed to the system. When a package is deployed, the contents of the package are copied to the appropriate locations on the system.
To deploy a package, complete the following steps:
1. Note the name of the APmax system in the caption of the Package Management window
Package Management for the correct system.
2. Press the Install button located below the list of installed packages in the Package Man-
agement window. The Select a Package to Deploy window (see Figure 16-3) will be dis-
played.
The top of the Select a Package to Deploy window contains the Location field and Browse button and is used to locate packages for deployment. The middle of the window is used to preview the contents of a package before it is deployed. The Install button at the bottom of the window is used to confirm the deployment of a package to the APmax system.
The Deploy Only to Unit(s) selection box in the lower left-hand corner of the window is used to choose the units on the system to which the package should be deployed. The
Deploy Only to Unit(s) selection box should be set to “All” unless vendor documentation or vendor support personnel specifically designate otherwise.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-230Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Figure 16-3 Select a Package to Deploy
3. Choose the path to the folder containing the new package using one of the following mechanisms:
• Enter the path to the folder in the Location field and press <Enter> on the keyboard.
• Press the Browse button (located in the upper-right corner of the window) to display
the Browse For Folder window (see Figure 16-4) and navigate to the folder containing
the package.
• If packages have been previously deployed to the APmax system, the paths to the locations of those packages can be selected by clicking the button next to the Browse button to display a drop-down list of the previously used locations.
• Click the button next to the Browse button and select one of the following options from the top of the drop-down list:
Pre-Staged
Packages
Selecting this option will display the primary service and sys-
tem packages that have been automatically downloaded from
Innovative Systems and are ready to install. See Chapter 4 -
"Network Configuration" for information on which ports need to
be open for the APmax to receive pre-staged packages.
Patch Packages
Displays the patch packages that have been downloaded and are ready to install.
Utility Packages
Displays the utility packages that have been downloaded and are ready to install.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-231Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Once a folder is entered or selected, any packages in that folder will be displayed in the
Package Files list on the left-hand side of the Select a Package to Deploy window.
Figure 16-4 Browse for a Package
4. Select the package you wish to deploy in the Package Files list on the left-hand side of the window. The contents of the package will be displayed in the General Info, Dependen-
cies, and Contents tabs to the right of the list. These tabs are described below. Preview the information in each tab and then continue to the next step.
Figure 16-5 General Info Tab
The package properties found in the General Info tab are described below:
Name
A short, descriptive name of the package.
GUID
Version
Description
The unique package ID.
The version number of this package.
A paragraph describing the purpose of this package.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-232Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Figure 16-6 Dependencies Tab
The Dependencies tab contains the following three columns of information for each package that is required for this package:
Name
The name of a package that is required for the currently selected package.
Version
Operator
The version number of the required package that is combined with the Operator to determine which version(s) of the required package are necessary for the selected package.
The logical operator used to indicate if the version of the required package must be less than the selected package, greater than the selected package, et al.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 16-7 Tables Tab
-233Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Selecting the Contents tab will display the following tabs: Tables, Files, Licenses,
Announcements, and Addons. The Tables tab (Figure 16-7) contains a list of the tables
found in the package. The following properties of each table are displayed in the list:
Name
A short, descriptive name of the table.
Version
The version number of the table.
Figure 16-8 Files Tab
The Files tab (Figure 16-8) contains a list of the files found in the package. The following
properties of each file are displayed in the list:
Name
The name of the file.
Category
Build
Revision
Overwrite
The type of file (e.g., Driver, Executable, Library, Script).
The build number of the file.
The revision number of the file.
The property only applies to files that do not have a version. If this box is checked, then this file will overwrite any existing files with the same name and path when the package is deployed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-234Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Figure 16-9 Licenses Tab
The Licenses tab (Figure 16-9) contains three informational fields and a list of the licenses
included in the package.
Generated
The date the package license information was generated.
System ID
The ID of the system to which these licenses apply.
Package Name
The name of the package these licenses are associated with.
The following properties of each license are displayed in the list:
Scope
The system unit(s) to which this license applies. If the Scope is
“System Wide”, then the license applies to all units on the system. If the license is for a specific unit, then the value will be
“Unit x” where x is the number of the unit to which the license applies.
Consumer Name
The name of the service or feature that utilizes this license.
Resource Name
The name of the resource that is being licensed for the associated consumer. Examples of resources are channels, ports, additional capabilities, subscribers, etc.
Expiration Date
Maximum
The date on which this license will no longer be in effect. An
Expiration Date of “Never” indicates the license will not expire.
The greatest number of the associated resource that is allowed by this license.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-235Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
The Announcements tab is divided into three tabs: Announcement Sets, Announcements, and Fragments. These tabs are described below.
Figure 16-10 Annoucements Sets Tab
The Announcements Sets tab (Figure 16-10) contains a list of the sets of announcements
found in the package. The following properties of each announcement set are displayed in the list:
SetID
The unique ID of this set of announcements.
Description
A short description of the type of announcements contained in this set.
Figure 16-11 Annoucements Tab
The Announcements tab (selected in Figure 16-11) contains a list of the announcements
found in the package. The following properties of each announcement are displayed in the list:
GUID
The unique announcement ID.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-236Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Version
Chapter 16 - Package Management
The version number of the announcement.
Annc. Text
Description
The text that the announcement will voice when it is played.
A short description of the announcement.
Figure 16-12 Fragments Tab
The Fragments tab (Figure 16-12) contains a list of the fragments found in the package.
The following properties of each fragment are displayed in the list:
Language
The language of the fragment: English or Spanish.
Voice
File Name
Frag Text
GUID
Default
Inflection
Version
The gender voicing this fragment: female or male.
The name of the audio file that plays this fragment.
The text that will be voiced when this fragment is played.
The unique ID of this fragment.
This box is checked if the fragment is part of the default set of fragments.
The location of the inflection voiced in the fragment: Ending or
None.
The version number of the fragment.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-237Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Figure 16-13 Addons Tab
The Addons tab (Figure 16-13) contains a list of the addons found in the package. The fol-
lowing properties of each addon are displayed in the list:
File Name
The name of an addon DLL file in this package.
Version
The version number of the addon DLL file.
5. To confirm the deployment of the selected package to the APmax system, press the Install button at the bottom of the window. The Select a Package to Deploy window will be
closed and a Deploying Package(s) progress window similar to Figure 16-14 will be dis-
played while the package is being deployed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 16-14 Package Deployment Progress
-238Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Once the deployment is complete, the Deploying Package(s) window will indicate the
package was installed successfully, as illustrated in Figure 16-15.
Figure 16-15 Package Deployment Complete
Press the Close button to exit the Deploying Package(s) window. The newly deployed package will be displayed in the list of installed packages in the Package Management window.
16.1.2 Deleting a Package
WARNING! Use this command with EXTREME CAUTION. Do NOT delete the
Base Package without Innovative Systems Technical Support supervision.
Deleting other packages may cause various services and features in the
APmax system to no longer function.
To delete a package from an APmax system, click on the package in the list of installed packages
in the Package Management window (see Figure 16-2) and press the Remove button located
below the list. A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed (see Figure 16-16).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 16-16 Delete Confirmation Prompt
-239Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Press the Yes button to complete the removal of the selected package and all of files contained in the package from the APmax system. Files that are shared with other packages that are installed
Figure 16-17 Package Removal Complete
Press the OK button to close the message box. The deleted package will no longer be displayed in the list of installed packages in the Package Management window.
16.1.3 Package Properties
The Package Properties window (see Figure 16-18) is used to display the contents of a package
that has already been deployed to the APmax system. To view the contents of a package, select
the package from the list of installed packages in the Package Management window (see Figure
16-2) and press the Properties button located below the list. A Package Properties window con-
taining the details of the selected package will be displayed.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 16-18 Package Properties Window
-240Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
The top portion of the Package Properties window contains the following fields:
Name
A short, descriptive name of the package.
GUID
Version
Description
The unique package ID.
The version number of this package.
A paragraph describing the purpose of this package.
The bottom portion of the Package Properties window is partitioned into the Files tab (see Figure
16-19), Dependencies tab (see Figure 16-20), Licenses tab (see Figure 16-21), Tables tab (see Fig-
ure 16-22), and Annoucements tab, which is divided into three tabs (see Figure 16-23, Figure 16-
24, and Figure 16-25). The columns in all tabs may be sorted by clicking on the column headings.
The Files tab (Figure 16-19) contains the following two columns of information for each file in
the package:
Name
The location and name of the file on the system.
Build
The build number of the file on the system.
Figure 16-19 Files Tab
The Dependencies tab (Figure 16-20) contains the following three columns of information for
each package that is required for this package:
GUID
The unique ID of a package that is required for the currently selected package.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-241Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Version
Chapter 16 - Package Management
The version number of the required package that is combined with the Operator to determine which version(s) of the required package are necessary for the selected package.
Operator
The logical operator used to indicate if the version of the required package must be less than the selected package, greater than the selected package, et al.
Figure 16-20 Dependencies Tab
The Licenses tab (Figure 16-21) contains the following five columns of information for each
license included in this package:
Consumer Name
The name of the service or feature that utilizes this license.
Resource Name
The name of the resource that is being licensed for the associated consumer. Examples of resources are channels, ports, additional capabilities, subscribers, etc.
Scope
The system unit(s) to which this license applies. If the Scope is
“System Wide”, then the license applies to all units on the system. If the license is for a specific unit, then the value will be
“Unit x” where x is the number of the unit to which the license applies.
Expiration Date
The date on which this license will no longer be in effect. An
Expiration Date of “Never” indicates the license will not expire.
Maximum
The greatest number of the associated resource that is allowed by this license.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-242Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Figure 16-21 Licenses Tab
The Tables tab (Figure 16-22) contains the following two columns of information for each table
included in this package:
Name
A short, descriptive name of the table.
Version
The version number of the table.
Figure 16-22 Tables Tab
The Announcements tab is divided into three tabs: Announcement Sets, Announcements, and
Fragments. These tabs are described below.
The Announcements Sets tab (see Figure 16-23) contains a list of the sets of announcements found
in the package. The following properties of each announcement set are displayed in the list:
SetID
The unique ID of this set of announcements.
Description
A short description of the type of announcements contained in this set.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-243Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Figure 16-23 Announcements Sets Tab
The Announcements tab (selected in Figure 16-24) contains a list of the announcements found in
the package. The following properties of each announcement are displayed in the list:
GUID
The unique announcement ID.
Version
Annc. Text
Description
The version number of the announcement.
The text that the announcement will voice when it is played.
A short description of the announcement that may contain the name and type of the announcement.
Figure 16-24 Announcements Tab
The Fragments tab (Figure 16-25) contains a list of the fragments found in the package.
The following properties of each fragment are displayed in the list:
Language
The language of the fragment: English or Spanish.
Voice
File Name
The gender voicing this fragment: female or male.
The name of the audio file that plays this fragment.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-244Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Frag Text
Chapter 16 - Package Management
The text that will be voiced when this fragment is played.
GUID
Default
The unique ID of this fragment.
This box is checked if the fragment is part of the default set of fragments.
Inflection
Version
The location of the inflection voiced in the fragment: Ending or
None.
The version number of the fragment.
Figure 16-25 Fragments Tab
16.1.3.1 Auditing a Package
Packages that have been installed on an APmax system can be audited to verify the files in the package match the files on each unit in the system. This feature is intended for use in verifying redundancy in file versions between packages and all units on a system.
To audit a package, right-click on the package in the list of installed packages in the Package
Management window (see Figure 16-2) to invoke a popup menu (see Figure 16-26 below), and
select the Audit command in the menu. A progress window (Figure 16-27) will be displayed
while the package is being audited.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 16-26 Select the Audit Menu Command
-245Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 16 - Package Management
Figure 16-27 Package Audit Progress
displayed.
Figure 16-28 Package Audit Succeeded
Figure 16-29 Package Audit Information Window
Each unit in the APmax system is represented by a row in the Package Audit Information window.
On the left-hand side of each unit’s row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to display a list of
errors found by the audit (as illustrated in Figure 16-29). If discrepancies are found for any pack-
age other than the base package, it may be necessary to re-deploy the package.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-246Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
The Report Viewer tool allows system administrators to create and view reports of subscribers and enhanced services on an APmax system. The purpose of this chapter is to describe the functionality of the Report Viewer tool. For more information on specific subscriber or enhanced ser-
vice field definitions, see Chapter 26 - "Subscriber Management" in this manual or the
appropriate Service Description document included with each enhanced service.
To access the Report Viewer interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command
Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Maintenance | Report Viewer com-
mand (as illustrated in Figure 17-1).
Figure 17-1 Report Viewer Menu Command
A progress window similar to Figure 17-2 will be displayed while the most recent backup data-
bases are downloaded from the APmax and stored on your local PC. The databases will only be downloaded from the APmax if there are more recent backup files available. APmax database backups occur daily at approximately 3 A.M.
Note: If an APmax Central Reporting Service Address has been configured (see Section 3.3.4.2)
in your APmax UI installation then the APmax backup databases will be retrieved from an alternate server instead of the APmax system.
Figure 17-2 Database Retrieval Progress
Once the database retrieval process is complete, a Report Viewer window similar to Figure 17-3
will be displayed. The name of the system for which you are creating and viewing reports will be
displayed at the top of the Report Viewer window (Figure 17-3). A list of the APmax databases
that are available for reporting will be displayed on the left-hand side of the window. These data-
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-247Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer bases are grouped by service (i.e. Subscriber, Voicemail). The Subscriber group is available in all
APmax configurations. The availability of other groups depends on which enhanced services are installed on the selected APmax system.
Figure 17-3 Report Viewer Window
The timestamp of the most recent database backup is displayed at the bottom of the white draw control page in the middle of the Report Viewer window. The Click Here To Get Latest link on the right-hand side of the timestamp can be pressed to force the APmax to generate new backup databases, which will be automatically downloaded, providing Report Viewer with the most cur-
rent information. A progress window similar to Figure 17-4 will be displayed while the databases
are backed up and downloaded.
Figure 17-4 Database Backup Progress
Instructions for using Report Viewer functions to create, view, and manage reports are found in the following sections:
• Section 17.1 - "Creating a Report"
• Section 17.2 - "Viewing Reports"
a. 17.2.1 - "Printing and Exporting Reports"
• Section 17.3 - "Report Management Operations" a. 17.3.1 - "Saving Reports"
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-248Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
b. 17.3.2 - "Renaming Reports" c. 17.3.3 - "Password-Protecting Reports"
d. 17.3.4 - "Deleting Reports" e. 17.3.5 - "Scheduling Report Emails"
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
17.1 Creating a Report
The following steps provide a general guide to creating a new report using the Report Viewer tool.
1. Open the Report Viewer tool if it is not already open. If the Report Viewer tool is already open and there are items in the white draw control page in the middle of the window, then press the New button at the top of the Report Viewer window to begin creating a new report.
2. Click on the Subscriber icon on the left-hand side of the Report Viewer window and
drag it to the white draw control page in the middle of the window (as illustrated in Figure
17-5). The name of the new report will be displayed at the top and center of the draw con-
trol. The report is tentatively named “New Search” since it has not yet been saved. Also notice that there is now a Columns heading on the left-hand side of the draw control.
Beneath the Columns heading is a list of all the database fields that will be displayed in the report. At this time the only fields listed are the Name and Default Phone Number fields since they were added to the report by default when the Subscriber icon was dragged onto the draw control.
Figure 17-5 Draw Control with Subscriber Icon
Note: The Subscriber icon is not required to create a report. Enhanced service icons such as Voice Mail may be used independently to create reports that do not include information from the Subscriber database. However, the Subscriber database is present in all APmax configurations and is used as an example throughout this procedure.
Unwanted icons in the draw control can be removed by right-clicking on a single icon in the draw control to invoke a popup menu and selecting the Delete command in the menu,
as illustrated in Figure 17-6.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-249Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-6 Delete Popup Command
3. Click on the Subscriber icon in the draw control in the middle of the Report Viewer window. The Columns and Criteria tabs on the right-hand side of the window will display a list of the fields found in the Subscriber database.
4. Select the Columns tab (see Figure 17-7). Notice each field has a checkbox next to it.
Check the box next to each field that should be included in the report. In the example below, the Default Phone Number, Name, and Service List fields are checked.
Figure 17-7 Columns Tab for Subscriber Records
5. Select the Criteria tab. To the right of each field in the tab is a cell that contains the user-
specified criteria for that field. Figure 17-8 illustrates a Criteria tab where records
included in the database report must have “605555” in the Default Phone Number field and must also be subscribed to one of the following three enhanced services: Terminating
Call Management, Universal Call Management, or Voice Mail.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-250Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-8 Criteria Tab for Subscriber Records
Clicking in the cell next to a field will display a dropdown button . Clicking the button will display a filter control that allows you to narrow the scope of values to be considered for that database field when the report is generated. The filter control will vary depending on the type of data that is associated with the selected field. For example, clicking the dropdown button next to the Service List field will display a filter control similar to the
one seen in Figure 17-9, while clicking the button next to the Default Phone Number field
previous number of days/weeks/months/years) to be specified.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 17-9 Criteria Tab - Service List Menu
-251Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-10 Criteria Tab - Default Phone Number Menu
Figure 17-11 Criteria Tab - Date Criteria Menu
To remove the criteria specified for a field, right-click in the field to invoke a popup menu
and select the Reset command, as illustrated in Figure 17-12.
Figure 17-12 Reset Command for Criteria
Some reports may require more than one of the same type of icon to specify all of the desired criteria. For example, if two ranges of Default Phone Number field values need to be specified, then two Subscriber icons would be required. To facilitate this, right-click on the Subscriber icon to invoke a popup menu and select the Create ‘Or’ command (as
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 17-13 Create ‘Or’ Command
-252Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
When the Create ‘Or’ command is selected, a second Subscriber icon will be added to the draw control with a logical “OR” link between the first and second Subscriber icons (see
Figure 17-14). The report will now consider Subscriber database records that match the
criteria specified for either Subscriber icon. Clicking on the second Subscriber icon will
display a Criteria tab (see Figure 17-8) for that icon, which allows additional Subscriber
database criteria to be specified for the report.
Figure 17-14 Additional Criteria
To remove an icon that is connected with an “OR” link, right-click on the icon and select
the Detach command from the popup menu, as shown in Figure 17-15.
Figure 17-15 Detach Command
Set the desired criteria for this report and continue to the next step.
6. The draw control in the center of the Report Viewer window should now display all of the columns and criteria you have specified. The criteria list will be attached to the Subscriber
icon, as illustrated in Figure 17-16.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 17-16 Draw Control with Criteria
-253Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
To view the current contents of the report, press the Results button in the lower right-hand
corner of the Report Viewer window. A results screen similar to Figure 17-17 will be dis-
played. The report will have columns for each database field that was checked in the Col-
umns tab. For more information on the results screen, see Section 17.2 - "Viewing
Reports". Close the results screen and save the report (see Section 17.3.1 - "Saving
Reports") or make any other desired changes. For information on including database
fields from enhanced services in the report, continue to the next step.
Figure 17-17 Subscriber Report Preview
7. If the Voice Mail Service or another enhanced service supported by Report Viewer is installed on the current APmax system, the icons representing those services can be dragged from the groups on the left-hand side of the Report Viewer window onto the draw control in the center of the window to create a report that includes fields from multiple databases. For example, if a Subscriber icon already exists in the draw control and a
Voice Mail icon
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-254Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-18 Draw Control with Two Databases
Clicking on any icon in the draw control will display the fields for the associated database in the Columns and Criteria tabs, allowing fields and filters for each database to be included or excluded in the report. By default, icons that are added to the draw control
have a Must Have link relationship with the previously added icon (see Figure 17-18 and
Figure 17-19). A Must Have link indicates that records must satisfy the criteria specified
for both icons before they will be included in the report. This link relationship can be changed to May Have by right-clicking on the first icon to invoke a popup menu and
selecting the Link Type | May Have command (as illustrated in Figure 17-19). A May
Have link indicates that records do not need to satisfy the criteria specified for the second icon to be included in the report.
Figure 17-19 Link Type Command
In the example shown in Figure 17-20, the Voice Mail Configuration icon
has been added to the draw control and criteria has been specified for each database. The criteria for each database is listed under the name of the associated icon. For example, “Mailbox
Type Include: Single (Normal)” is listed under Voice Mail. This indicates that only subscribers who have a “Single (Normal)” type of Voice Mail Service mailbox will be included in the report. Subscribers with other mailbox types such as Family, Routing, or
Automated Attendant will be excluded. Also, the “Options Package Description Include
Platinum” criteria is listed under Voice Mail Configuration. This indicates that only
Voice Mail Service Subscribers with the Platinum package will be included in the report.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-255Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-20 Draw Control with Three Databases
Pressing the Results button in the lower right-hand corner of the Report Viewer window
tions of the criteria specified in the draw control.
Figure 17-21 Subscriber Report with Multiple Databases
For information on managing reports that have already been created, see the following sections.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-256Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
17.2 Viewing Reports
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
There are two ways to open an existing report in Report Viewer. If a report has opened previously from within the current APmax UI installation then it can be opened again by selecting it in the
Recent drop-down box at the top of the Report Viewer window (see Figure 17-22). If the report is
not available in the Recent drop-down box, then it can be accessed by pressing the Open button at the top of the window. This will display a standard file selection window that will allow you to choose the RVF (Report Viewer File) file that you wish to view. Once a report file is selected using one of these methods, the white draw control page in the center of the Report Viewer window will be populated with the databases, columns, and criteria defined in that report.
Figure 17-22 Recent Report Selection Box
To view a report that includes all of the databases, columns, and criteria in the draw control, press the Results button in the lower right-hand corner of the Report Viewer window. A screen similar
to Figure 17-23 will be displayed. The report will have columns for each database field that was
checked in the Columns tab of each icon in the draw control.
Figure 17-23 Report with Multiple Databases
Alternatively, a report can be viewed that contains only the columns and criteria specified for one database icon. This is accomplished by right-clicking on a single icon in the draw control to
invoke a popup menu and selecting the Preview command in the menu, as illustrated in Figure 17-
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-257Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-24 Preview Popup Command
Functions available in the Report Viewer screen (Figure 17-23) are described in the following set-
ions:
• Section 17.2.1 - "Printing and Exporting Reports"
• Section 17.2.2 - "Copying Report Data to the Clipboard"
17.2.1 Printing and Exporting Reports
To export or print a report created using the APmax UI’s Report Viewer, first open the report in the Report Viewer and then press the Results button or use the Preview popup command to dis-
button, the To
Excel button, and the Preview button. These buttons function as follows:
• Press the To CSV button to save the contents of the report window as a comma-separated value (CSV) file that can be imported and edited by most spreadsheet, database, and word processing applications. When the button is pressed, a standard Save As window will be displayed. Enter the file name and press the Save button to create the CSV file. The CSV file can now be manually opened by any program that supports viewing CSV files.
Note: Exporting to a CSV file is the only option for saving the contents of reports that contain more than 65,536 records. However, some CSV file viewing applications (e.g. Excel
2003) do not support viewing more than 65,536 records, so while the exported CSV file may contain more than 65,536 records, the number of records that can be viewed will be subject to the limitations of the CSV file viewer. Applications such as Excel 2007 support displaying more than 65,536 records.
• The To Excel button is used to export the contents of the report window into an XLS file and display it in your default XLS file viewer. This button will be disabled if the current report contains more than 65,536 records.
• Pressing the Preview button will display a print preview screen (see Figure 17-25) contain-
ing a table of the records in the report. This button will be disabled if the current report contains more than 65,536 records.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-258Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-25 Report Viewer Print Preview
The preview screen contains the standard print preview functions that allow the contents of the window to be printed, exported, or e-mailed. The File menu at the top of the screen provides access to these functions.
The File | Export Document command (illustrated in Figure 17-26) allows the report to be saved
in a variety of document formats (PDF, HTML, MHT, RTF, XLS, XLSX, CSV, Text, Image).
Figure 17-26 Export Document Menu
The File | Send E-mail menu command (illustrated in Figure 17-27) allows the report to be
emailed as a document attachment.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-259Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-27 Send E-mail Menu
17.2.2 Copying Report Data to the Clipboard
Report Viewer data can be copied from the results table to the clipboard by following these steps:
1. Open a report in Report Viewer.
2. Press the Results button or use the Preview popup command to display the contents of the report.
3. Do one of the following: a. To copy the contents of an individual cell, right-click on the cell and select the Copy
command in the popup menu (illustrated in Figure 17-28).
Figure 17-28 Copying a Cell
b. To copy the contents of one row, right-click on the row indicator box on the left-hand side of the row and select the Copy command in the popup menu.
c. To copy the contents of multiple rows, hold the Shift or Ctrl key down while left-clicking on the rows, and then right-click on the row indicator box on the left-hand side of a
selected row and select the Copy command in the popup menu (illustrated in Figure
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-260Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-29 Copying Multiple Rows
4. Paste the copied data into a document or spreadsheet.
17.3 Report Management Operations
The operations used to manage Report Viewer report files are found in the following sections:
• Section 17.3.1 - "Saving Reports"
• Section 17.3.2 - "Renaming Reports"
• Section 17.3.3 - "Password-Protecting Reports"
• Section 17.3.4 - "Deleting Reports"
• Section 17.3.5 - "Scheduling Report Emails"
17.3.1 Saving Reports
Report configurations (i.e. draw control contents, columns, criteria) can be saved by pressing the
Save button (see Figure 17-30) located in the lower right-hand corner of the Report Viewer win-
dow. If the report has not been saved previously, a standard Save As window will be displayed.
Enter the file name and press the Save button in the Save As window to create the new report file.
Figure 17-30 Save Button Menu
Previously saved report files can be saved as a different file by using the Save As command in the
drop-down menu that is accessed by pressing the arrow next to the Save button (see Figure 17-
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-261Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
When saving a report, if a report with the same file name is currently scheduled for email delivery
(see Section 17.3.5 - "Scheduling Report Emails") then a prompt to update the scheduled report
will be displayed (see Figure 17-31). Choosing Yes in the prompt will update the scheduled report
and choosing No will save the current report locally, but will not update the report scheduled for email delivery.
Figure 17-31 Prompt to Update Scheduled Report
17.3.2 Renaming Reports
To rename an existing report, open the report in Report Viewer and click the Rename button in the
lower right-hand corner of the Report Viewer window. The New Name window (see Figure 17-
32) will be displayed. Enter the new report name and press the OK button to confirm the change.
Figure 17-32 New Name Window
17.3.3 Password-Protecting Reports
Report Viewer reports can be password-protected to prevent those who do not know the password from changing the report configuration. The report may still be viewed without knowing the password, but it will be read-only and cannot be altered unless the correct password is entered.
To password-protect a report, check the Read Only box in the lower right-hand corner of the
Report Viewer window and press the Save button. An Enter Password window (see Figure 17-33)
will be displayed. The password you enter will be case-sensitive. Enter the password and press
OK to save it. Attempts to open the report in the future will result in a prompt to enter the password.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-262Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-33 Enter Password Window
17.3.4 Deleting Reports
To delete a report, select it the Recent dropdown box at the top of the Report Viewer window (see
Figure 17-34) and press the Delete button. A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed.
Choose Yes in the prompt to complete the deletion or No to cancel the deletion.
Figure 17-34 Select a Report to Delete
17.3.5 Scheduling Report Emails
Report configurations that have been saved (see Section 17.3.1 - "Saving Reports") can be sched-
uled to run automatically. The results will then be sent to a list of email addresses. The following steps provide a guide for scheduling report emails.
NOTE: Reports containing ACD Statistics or IPTV Channel Stats cannot be scheduled at this time.
1. A common database location must be configured in your APmax UI installation so that
APmax backup databases are retrieved from a server other than the APmax system. See
Section 3.3.4.2 - "Advanced Settings" for information on setting up the APmax Central
Reporting Service Address.
2. Open the Report Viewer tool if it is not already open.
3. Press the Schedule button in the lower, right-hand corner of the Report Viewer window
(Figure 17-3) to display the Scheduled Reports window (Figure 17-35). The Schedule
button is only available if the APmax Central Reporting Service Address has been configured, as indicated in Step 1.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-263Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
Figure 17-35 Scheduled Reports Window
4. The Report Name list on the left-hand side of the Scheduled Reports window displays all of the reports that are configured for scheduled emails. Press the Add button below the list to begin adding a report. This will display a standard file selection window that will allow you to choose the RVF (Report Viewer File) file that you wish to use.
5. After selecting an RVF file as indicated in the previous step, press the Open button in the
file selection window to display the Report Schedule window (Figure 17-36).
Figure 17-36 Report Schedule Entry
6. The Report Schedule window contains the settings listed below. Select a value for each setting and press the OK button.
Report Name
Name of the report being scheduled.
Attachment
Type
Report Frequency
Document format in which the report results will be saved
(CSV, Excel, PDF). The resulting file will be attached to the report email.
How frequently the report will be generated and emailed.
Options include Daily, Weekly, and Monthly.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-264Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Day of Week/
Month
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer
The specific day of the week, or day of the month, on which the report will be generated and emailed. This option is only available if Report Frequency is set to Weekly or Monthly.
7. Select the newly scheduled report in the Report Name list. The settings for the selected report will be displayed in the Schedule tab. These settings can be adjusted at any time.
8. Enter an email address to which the selected report should be sent by pressing the Add but-
ton below the Email Addresses list. This will display an Add Email entry form (Figure 17-
37. Enter the address and press the OK button to finish adding it to list. Multiple email
addresses may be entered for each scheduled report.
Figure 17-37 Add Email Address
9. The report is now scheduled to be generated and emailed. To view a history of report
emails, select a report in the Report Name list and then select the Logs tab (see Figure 17-
38). This will show the time and email results for the scheduled report. Figure 17-39
shows an example of a successful scheduled report email that has a CSV file attached.
Figure 17-38 Logs Tab
Figure 17-39 Example Report Email
If a report email is not sent successfully, follow these steps to find more information about the problem using Event Viewer:
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-265Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 17 - Report Viewer a. Open Event Viewer on the PC or server where the APmax Central Reporting Service is running. To open Event Viewer in Windows 7, click the Start button, type Event
Viewer in the Search box, and then double-click Event Viewer in the list of results.
b. View the Application event log in Event Viewer. In Windows 7 this is done by expanding the Windows Logs tree item and clicking on Application.
sent.
Figure 17-40 Event Viewer
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-266Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 18 - System Upgrade Manager
Chapter 18 - System Upgrade Manager
The System Upgrade Manager tool allows APmax system upgrades to be performed with little or no assistance from Innovative Systems technical support personnel. This allows system administrators to upgrade on their own schedule and in a more timely manner. Upgrade progress reports are available throughout the process.
To access the System Upgrade Manager interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the
Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Maintenance | System
Upgrade Manager command (as illustrated in Figure 18-1).
Figure 18-1 System Upgrade Manager Menu Command
The System Upgrade Manager introduction screen (Figure 18-2) displays a general warning that
should be read prior to attempting a system upgrade. Below the warning is an Upgrade Procedure
Documentation link that should be clicked to download a PDF containing detailed upgrade information.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 18-2 System Upgrade Manager Window
-267Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 18 - System Upgrade Manager
The Base Package box and AudioSubSystem Package box in the System Upgrade Manager win-
dow indicate whether or not these packages are up-to-date on Unit 1 and Unit 2. Figure 18-2
illustrates packages that need to be upgraded, and Figure 18-3 illustrates packages that are up-to-
date. The Prepare Upgrade button at the bottom of the window will be disabled if the system is up-to-date, but will be enabled if local files are used for the upgrade (see Advanced Settings below).
Figure 18-3 Packages Up-to-Date
Advanced Settings
The Advanced Settings section (Figure 18-4) of the System Upgrade Manager interface can be
expanded to customize the actions that take place during the upgrade process.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 18-4 Advanced Settings
-268Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 18 - System Upgrade Manager
Databases
Upgrade Files
Progress Emails
Upgrade Process
Table 18-1 Advanced Settings
Check the Perform Database Backup box to backup the
APmax databases and store them on the local PC’s hard drive, or uncheck to disable database backup. This option is checked by default.
Choose the Download Automatically option (selected by default) to download the latest release packages from the Innovative Systems FTP site, or choose the Specify Local Files option and navigate to the TAR File or Package file that will be used instead of downloading from the FTP site.
Check the Send Progress Emails box (unchecked by default) to have several progress reports emailed from the specified Email
Server throughout the upgrade process.
The Upgrade Unit 1 and Upgrade Unit 2 boxes can be checked
(upgrade) or unchecked (do not upgrade) to upgrade units independently, if necessary. Both boxes are checked by default.
Check the Upgrade Units Simultaneously box (unchecked by default) to do a service outage upgrade.
Check the Require Upgrade Confirmation box (checked by default) to pause the process after the non-upgrade steps and allow the upgrade to be continued at a later time. For example, checking this box would allow all necessary files to be transferred to the system during business hours, but the actual upgrade could be paused until a specified service window.
Upgrade Process
Press the Prepare Upgrade button at the bottom of the System Upgrade Manager window to display a confirmation prompt, and then press Yes in the prompt to begin the upgrade process. The
System Upgrade Manager screen will now display the steps required to finish the upgrade and the
current status of each step (illustrated in Figure 18-5).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-269Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 18 - System Upgrade Manager
Figure 18-5 Upgrade Progress Screen
ton will also be displayed if the Send Progress Emails box is checked, allowing the email settings to be verified prior to the start of the upgrade. If the Require Upgrade Confirmation box is not checked then the upgrade process will run until completion.
Figure 18-6 Non-Upgrade Steps Completed
Pressing the Test Email button (if available) will show the Email Settings window (Figure 18-7),
which can be used to adjust the Email Server and address settings, and will send two test emails
(one for each APmax unit) which contain system configuration information.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-270Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 18 - System Upgrade Manager
Figure 18-7 Test Email Settings
Press the Start Upgrade button to continue the upgrade process. The System Upgrade Manager screen will show the upgrade status of the units that are being upgraded. If both units are being
upgraded then a prompt will be displayed when the Unit 1 upgrade is complete (see Figure 18-8).
After validating that Unit 1 is in service, press the Resume Upgrade button to begin upgrading
Unit 2.
Figure 18-8 Unit 1 Complete - Resume Upgrade Prompt
For support purposes, a log file is created for each system upgrade. The log file is located in the
“Documents” folder of the logged in PC user. When the upgrade is finished a prompt will display
loaded files are located. Automatically downloaded files will be deleted automatically upon a successful upgrade.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-271Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 18 - System Upgrade Manager
Figure 18-9 Upgrade Complete
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-272Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Part 4 - System
Surveillance
Overview
Part 4 provides instructions for using the system surveillance functions that are included in the
APmax UI software.
The following chapters are found in System Surveillance:
• Chapter 20 - "Digital Carrier Status"
• Chapter 21 - "Ethernet Switch Information"
To access the surveillance interfaces for an APmax system, right-click on the system’s icon
in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu. Select the System Surveil-
lance command to expand the popup menu, as illustrated in the figure below. The expanded menu will display all of the available surveillance interfaces for this system. Select a command from the expanded menu to display the associated interface.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
System Surveillance Menu
-273Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
NOTES:
• The name of the APmax system for which surveillance is being performed will be displayed in the caption of any window that is opened using the System Surveillance command. If the system name that is displayed in the caption is not the system you want to monitor, then close the window and right-click on the icon of the system you want to monitor.
• The Network Trace function in the System Surveiilance menu should not be used except under the direction of vendor technical support personnel.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-274Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Chapter 19 - Alarm Status APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 19 - Alarm Status
19.1 Monitoring System Alarms
The Alarm Status tool allows system administrators to view and monitor alarms on APmax systems. If an alarm is present on an APmax system, the system’s icon in the Command
Center window will have an alarm symbol in the upper left-hand corner of the icon. Hovering
the mouse pointer over the alarm symbol will display a tooltip (illustrated in Figure 19-1) contain-
ing a short description of the most recent alarm on the system.
Figure 19-1 System Alarm Tooltip
To access the Alarm Status interface, either click on the alarm symbol in the upper left-hand corner of the system’s icon or, if the symbol is not present because there are no alarms on the system, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup
menu and select the System Surveillance | Alarm Status command (as illustrated in Figure 19-2).
The name of the system for which you are viewing alarms will be displayed at the top of the
Alarm Status window (Figure 19-3).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 19-2 Alarm Status Menu Command
-275Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 19 - Alarm Status
Figure 19-3 Alarm Status Window
The left-hand side of the Alarm Status window displays a system icon for each unit in the selected APmax system. A symbol representing the most urgent alarm for each unit will be displayed above the system icon. These symbols are listed below:
Indicates there are no alarms present for this unit.
Indicates a minor alarm for this unit.
Indicates a major alarm for this unit.
Indicates a critical alarm for this unit.
The right-hand side of the Alarm Status window contains a list of the current alarms on all units in the selected APmax system. Each row in the list represents an individual alarm and contains the following information for that alarm: timestamp of the alarm, unit number, CPU, level of the alarm, and additional information that identifies the possible cause of the alarm.
In most cases, the alarm will be cleared by the system when the reason for the alarm has been corrected. However, some alarms have to be cleared manually. For example, if an alarm indicates a system restart, it must be cleared manually to acknowledge the occurrence of a system restart. To manually clear an alarm, select the alarm in the list, and press the Cancel Alarm button. Multiple alarms can be selected and cleared simultaneously by holding the Shift or Ctrl key down while selecting alarms.
To manage the notifications (audio and email) associated with each alarm level, see Section
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-276Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 19 - Alarm Status
tus window. The APmax UI will retrieve error log files from the APmax and display log entries for recently set or cleared alarms.
Note: Alarm History uses high speed Command Link File Transfer to retrieve log files from the APmax and therefore requires the selected system to have a minimum of APmax Release 4.2 and AudioSubsystem package version 4.3.33.
Figure 19-4 Alarm History
19.1.1 Alarm Notifications
Alarm Status will, by default, sound an audible alarm at the PC for the most urgent alarm present in the APmax system. To disable audible notifications for all of the alarms currently listed in the
Alarm Status window, press the Silence Audible button below the list. If a new alarm appears on the list after the Silence Audible button has been pressed, the audible notification will be reenabled.
To change the audio file associated with each level of alarm, or to configure email notifications of alarms, press the Options button in the Alarm Status window to display the Options window (see
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-277Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 19 - Alarm Status
Figure 19-5 Audible Alarm Options
The Options window displays each of the three alarm levels (Minor, Major, Critical), an Audio selection box for changing the sound associated with each alarm level, and a Play button for playing the sound associated with each alarm level.
Note: E-Mail Notification fields described below are only available if APmax Release 4.5.17 or greater is installed on the system hosting the subscriber record.
The SMTP Server and SMTP Port fields are used to enter the address and port of the SMTP server that will send alarm notification emails. The From Address is the email address that will be displayed as the source of any notification emails. The FQDN field is used to enter the fully qualified domain name to send in the HELO command. The Notification Address field for each alarm level is used to enter an email address that will receive email notifications when an alarm of the associated level occurs.
Alarms must be stable for two minutes before a notification email will be sent. Email notifica-
tions will be continue to be sent once per hour. Figure 19-6 provides an example of a notification
email for a major alarm on “System 123544” where the description of the alarm is “Test.”
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-278Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 19 - Alarm Status
Figure 19-6 Example Notification Email
The Audio selection box for each alarm level in the Options window contains the following three options:
None
No notification sound will be played for alarms of this level.
Default
The default notification sound will be played for alarms of this level.
Custom
A custom .wav file will be played for alarms of this level.
Selecting this option will display a standard file selection window. Use the file selection window to locate and select a .wav audio file and press the Open button. The path to the selected .wav file will be displayed below the selection box for the associated alarm level.
When the alarm notification sounds and email addresses have been set, press the OK button in the
Options window to save the settings and close the window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-279Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 19 - Alarm Status
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-280Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
The Digital Carrier Status tool allows system administrators to monitor the status of trunks and digital signalling (DS) ports for the APmax system. To access the Digital Carrier Status interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup
top of the Digital Carrier Status window, which is partitioned into four tabs: DS (see Figure 20-2
in Section 20.1), Trunks (see Figure 20-5 in Section 20.2), SIP (see Figure 20-6 in Section 20.3),
and Summary (see Figure 20-7 in Section 20.4).
Figure 20-1 Digital Carrier Status Menu Command
20.1 Monitoring DS Ports
The DS tab (Figure 20-2) is displayed by default when the Digital Carrier Status interface is
accessed. It contains information about the status of each DS1 and DS3 that is enabled for the
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-281Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
Figure 20-2 Digital Carrier Status - DS Tab
Each DS1 is represented by a row in the DS1 Status section of the tab. The following columns of information are available for each DS1:
Unit
The number of the APmax system unit on which this DS1 is located.
DS1
Status
The DS port that is being monitored.
The state of the DS port. Potential DS port states are INS (In
Service), SMB (Switch Made Busy), MMB (Man Made Busy), or
Unknown. MMB ports will only be shown if the Show MMB
DS1s box is checked in the upper left-hand corner of the win-
dow, as illustrated below in Figure 20-3.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 20-3 Show MMB DS1s Checkbox
-282Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
Timing Source
Indicates (Yes or No) if this DS1 is the sync master port. The sync master port is the preferred source of external clock synchronization, and is used to synchronize all internal clocks to the network or BITS clock.
On the left-hand side of each row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to display more statistical
details about the associated DS1 port, as illustrated in Figure 20-2.
At the bottom of the DS tab is the DS3 Status section, which shows the status and bipolar violation counts for each unit in the current APmax system.
20.2 Monitoring Trunks
The Trunks tab (Figure 20-4) displays the status of all DS channels that have been assigned to MF
and ISUP trunk groups. For more information on trunk groups, see Chapter 9 - "Trunk Configuration".
When the Trunks tab is first selected, the APmax UI will look at the trunk groups that are defined for the current APmax system and begin to query the status of the DS channels in those trunk groups. As the status of the channels in each trunk group is retrieved, the trunk groups will be dis-
played as rows in the Trunks tab. Figure 20-4 shows an example of what the Trunks tab may look
like initially.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 20-4 Trunks Tab - Collapsed View
-283Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
On the left-hand side of each trunk group (TG) row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to dis-
play the status of all DS channels in the trunk group. Figure 20-5 shows what the Trunks tab
might look like when a trunk group with several channels is displayed. A vertical scrollbar will
be displayed (see the right-hand side of the window in Figure 20-5) if the trunk groups and chan-
nels create a list longer than can be shown in the Digital Carrier Status window.
Figure 20-5 Trunks Tab - Expanded View
The following columns of information are given for each DS channel in the Trunks tab:
Unit
The number of the APmax system unit on which this trunk group is located.
DS1
Channel
CIC
The DS port that is being monitored.
The channel on the DS port that is being monitored.
The Circuit ID Code (CIC) used to identify trunk members in an
ISUP trunk group. This field will be blank if this is an MF trunk
group. CICs are assigned during trunk configuration (see Section 9.3 - "ISUP Trunk Groups").
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-284Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Admin State
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
The administrative state of the T1 channel may be Enabled or
Disabled.
The Admin State of the channel can be toggled to the opposite of its current state by right-clicking on the channel in the Trunks tab to invoke a popup menu, as illustrated in Figure 14-5, and then selecting the Enable/Disable menu command.
A trunk can also be set to be busy when idle by selecting the
Disable When Idle menu command from the popup menu.
CP State
Aux State
The Call Processing state of the T1 channel. The column will indicate whether the associated channel is IDLE (not currently in use), BUSY (currently in use), or OOS (out of service).
The Auxiliary States of the T1 channel. An example of Auxiliary
States are ISUP “local-blocked” or “remote-blocked” conditions that may be present on ISUP trunk group channels.
20.3 SIP Status
The SIP tab (Figure 20-6) is used to monitor and manage SIP activity for the selected APmax sys-
tem. The following columns of information are given for each APmax unit:
Unit
The number of the APmax system unit.
Active Call Count
Status
The number of SIP calls currently being handled by this APmax unit.
The state of SIP on this unit. Potential states are In Service,
Ignore Calls, or Redirect Calls. The state of a unit can be changed by right-clicking on the unit row to invoke a popup
menu (illustrated in Figure 20-6) and then selecting either the
Enable/Disable or Redirect Calls menu command.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-285Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
Figure 20-6 SIP Tab
20.4 DS Channel Summary
The Summary tab (Figure 20-7) provides a condensed view of all the DS channels that have been
assigned to MF and ISUP trunk groups on this APmax system. Channels may be viewed by
APmax unit or by trunk group by clicking the radio button next to the desired Display Mode at the top of the tab. Each configured channel is represented by a circular button that indicates the status of the channel by its color. A red button indicates the call processing state of the channel is out of service. A yellow button indicates the channel is idle, and a blue button indicates the channel is busy. Clicking on a channel button will display the following details about the selected channel in a section on the right-hand side of the tab: Unit, DS1, Channel, CIC, Admin State, Call
Processing State, and Aux State.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-286Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
Figure 20-7 Channel Summary Tab
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-287Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 20 - Digital Carrier Status
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-288Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Chapter 21 - Ethernet Switch Information AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 21 - Ethernet Switch Information
The Ethernet Switch Information interface allows system administrators to monitor statistics for all Ethernet switch ports on a given APmax system. To access the Ethernet Switch Information interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Surveillance | Ethernet Switch Information command (as illus-
Figure 21-1 Ethernet Switch Information Menu Command
Figure 21-2 Ethernet Switch Information Window
The left-hand side of the Ethernet Switch Information window contains a list of all the Ethernet switch ports that are being monitored. The list can be sorted by clicking on the column headings.
Selecting a port in the list will display the statistics for that port in the Statistics and Advanced Sta-
tistics tabs (see Section 21.1) located on the right side of the window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-289Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
The columns in the Switch Ports list are described below:
Unit
Chapter 21 - Ethernet Switch Information
The APmax system unit number on which this Ethernet switch port is located.
Port
Connected To
Enabled
Linked
Speed
Full Duplex
The Ethernet switch port number that is being monitored.
The device to which this switch port is connected (e.g. RJ45 port, Ethernet port, DSP).
This box will be checked if the switch port is enabled, and unchecked if the switch port is disabled.
This box will be checked if this switch port is used in parallel with other Ethernet ports to increase the link speed and redundancy beyond the limits of a single port. This box will be unchecked if the switch port is not linked.
The port speed. The speed is typically determined by the connected-to device.
This box will be checked if the duplex of the port is full-duplex.
If the duplex of the port is half-duplex, this box will be unchecked. This setting is typically determined by the connected-to device.
21.1 Switch Port Statistics
The right-hand side of the Ethernet Switch Information window contains two tabs that are used to display the statistics of the port that is currently selected in the Switch Ports list on the left-hand side of the window.
In the lower right-hand corner of the Ethernet Switch Information window are two buttons:
Refresh and Clear. Pressing the Refresh button will re-query the APmax system for the current
Ethernet switch statistics and will update the statistics display accordingly. Pressing the Clear button will reset the Ethernet switch counters to zero. This operation immediately updates the
APmax system (there is no “save” concept in this interface). After the clear operation is complete on the APmax, the statistics are re-queried and statistics display is updated.
The Statistics tab (see Figure 21-3) in the Ethernet Switch Information interface contains a list of
common statistics for the selected Ethernet switch port.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-290Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 21 - Ethernet Switch Information
Figure 21-3 Statistics Tab
The Advanced Statistics tab (see Figure 21-4) in the Ethernet Switch Information interface con-
tains a list of advanced statistics for the selected Ethernet switch port.
Figure 21-4 Advanced Statistics Tab
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-291Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 21 - Ethernet Switch Information
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-292Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Chapter 22 - Log Reader APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 22 - Log Reader
22.1 Viewing System Logs
The Log Reader tool allows system administrators to view the logs generated by the APmax system. To access the Log Reader interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Surveillance | Log Reader
Figure 22-1 Log Reader Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 22-2 Log Reader Window
-293Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 22 - Log Reader
The Log Reader window is divided into two panes. By default, the left pane displays a tree view of log categories (e.g. ap, sys, user). Expand these categories to display the logs that are available for viewing (e.g. ap.log, ap.log.1). In each log row there are three buttons that can be pressed to perform the following actions on the log: p
Press this button to connect to the InnoStream Server, transfer the selected log file from the server, and display the contents of the log in the right pane. See
Section 22.1.2 - "View Log" for more information.
Press this button to setup real-time log viewing. See Section 22.1.3 - "Real-
Time View of Log" for more information.
Press this button to setup log analysis. See Section 22.1.4 - "Analyze Log" for
more information.
22.1.1 Log Reader Toolbar
At the top of the Log Reader window is a toolbar that contains controls for printing, saving, copying, and refreshing log data. These controls are described below:
Press this button or Ctlr+P to print the rows currently selected in the right pane of the
Log Reader window. To select all rows in the right pane, press Ctrl+A on the keyboard.
Press this button or Ctrl+S to save the full contents of the currently selected log tab to your PC. The log can then be viewed in a text editor such as WordPad.
Press this button or Ctrl+C to copy to the contents of the rows currently selected in the right pane. The copied rows can then be pasted into a text editor, spreadsheet, email message body, etc. To select all rows in the right pane, press Ctrl+A on the keyboard.
Press this button or Ctrl+R to refresh the log file currently displayed in the right pane of the Log Reader window with the latest records on the system.
The Transfer Mode selection box offers the following options for retrieving logs from the APmax:
High Speed
Uses Command Link File Transfer to retrieve log files from the APmax. This option requires the APmax system to have APmax Release 4.2 or greater, and version 4.3.33 or greater of the AudioSubsystem package.
FTP
Uses slower File Transfer Protocol to download logs.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-294Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
22.1.2 View Log
Chapter 22 - Log Reader
When viewing the contents of a log, the right pane of the Log Reader window typically shows four columns of information for each record present in the log selected in the left pane. Some logs
(e.g. DspError) may only show the timestamp and error text. These columns are described below:
Log Time
The date and time this record was generated.
CPU
Type
Text
The APmax CPU for which this record was generated.
The category of the log record.
A summary of the log record.
Each time a different log file is viewed by pressing the button, a tab with the name of the log file will be added along the top of the right pane. Selecting a tab will display the contents of the associated log file. To close a tab, click the close button on the tab.
To search the contents of a log file, enter the search text into the box next to the search button
and press the button or the <Enter> key. Any log entries matching the entered text will be listed in a search results box at the bottom of the right pane. Clicking on a line in the search results will select the matching row in the log.
22.1.3 Real-Time View of Log
Real-time log viewing is initiated by pressing the button next to a log row in the left-hand
pane of the Log Reader window to show a setup screen similar to Figure 22-3. Entering text into
the Filter box of the setup screen is optional. Any text in the Filter box must be found in a log row for that row to be displayed.
Figure 22-3 Setup Realtime Log
Press the OK button to begin real-time viewing. A new tab similar to Figure 22-4 will be opened,
displaying in real-time any matching log entries that are reported by the system.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-295Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 22 - Log Reader
Figure 22-4 Tail Log
The pause/play button at the bottom of the tab can be used to stop and restart real-time log viewing. When real-time logging is stopped then the search box at the top of the tab will be enabled, allowing the contents of the tab to be searched.
22.1.4 Analyze Log
The log analyzer tool is used to plot the frequency with which specific terms are found in existing or real-time logs. This feature is accessed by pressing the button next to a log row in the
left-hand pane of the Log Reader window (Figure 22-2). This will open a tab for the selected log
file and display the log analysis settings, as shown in Figure 22-5.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-296Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 22 - Log Reader
Figure 22-5 Analyze Log
The Analysis Settings are described below:
Analyze Live Log
Selecting Yes will use real-time log analysis, and selecting No will download the existing log records found within the specified Start Analysis and
End Analysis time range and analyze them when the Apply Analysis button is pressed.
Analysis Term(s)
Start Analysis
End Analysis
Enter terms (words or phrases) into one or more rows in this list to search the log for those terms and plot the results.
When using existing log records (Analyze Live Log is set to No), this is the beginning of the time range of log records that will be included in the analysis.
When using existing log records (Analyze Live Log is set to No), this is the end of the time range of log records that will be included in the analysis.
Analysis Frequency
When using existing log records (Analyze Live Log is set to No), this value
(either 1Minute or 1 Hour) determines the frequency with which search results are grouped together and displayed in the analysis graph.
Press the Apply Analysis button to begin log analysis using the specified settings.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-297Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 22 - Log Reader
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-298Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Chapter 23 - SS7 Status APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 23 - SS7 Status
23.1 Monitoring SS7 Links
The SS7 Status tool allows system administrators to monitor SS7 links in APmax systems. SS7
links are defined in the SS7 Configuration interface, described in Section 8.2. To access the SS7
Status interface, right-click on the system’s icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the System Surveillance | SS7 Status command (as illustrated in
Figure 23-1 SS7 Status Menu Command
Figure 23-2 SS7 Status Window
The SS7 Status window contains a table of the SS7 linksets and links that have been defined (see
Section 8.2) for this APmax system. On the left-hand side of each linkset
row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to display or hide the link rows in the linkset. By default, all linksets are expanded to show the status of their links. A vertical scrollbar will be displayed on the right-hand side of the window if the linksets and links create a table longer than can be shown in the SS7 Status window.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-299Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 23 - SS7 Status
The list of links beneath each linkset row contains six columns of information about the SS7 links in the linkset. The lists can be sorted by clicking on the column headings. The columns are described below:
Unit
The number of the APmax system unit on which this link is located.
SLC
Status
The signaling link code used to match each link with the SRP/STP at the opposite end of the data link. The SLC is the only common link identity information used at both ends of the data link and is therefore used by the network element at each end of the link to transfer link status information to the opposite end of the link. Consequently, the SLC for each link must be unique within each APmax system.
The current status of the SS7 link. Potential states are as follows:
• Green - Link is in-service and is capable of carrying SS7 traffic.
• Yellow - Link is in a man-made-busy (MMB) state.
• Red - Link is in a switch-made-busy (SMB) state.
The status of an SS7 link can be changed by right-clicking on the
link to invoke a popup menu, as illustrated in Figure 23-3, and then
clicking the Enable/Disable command. If the command is selected when the status is INS or SMB, the status will be changed to MMB.
If the command is selected when the status is MMB, the status will be temporarily changed to SMB until the true status (INS or SMB) of the link is returned from the APmax system by either pressing the
Refresh button, or by closing and opening the SS7 Status user interface.
Figure 23-3 Enable/Disable SS7 Link
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-300Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Inhibit Status
Chapter 23 - SS7 Status
The current inhibition state of the SS7 link. Potential states are as follows:
• Green - Link is uninhibited and available.
• Yellow - Link is locally inhibited.
• Red - Link is remotely inhibited.
• Gray - Link is inhibited and unavailable.
The inhibition state of an SS7 link can be changed by right-clicking
on the link to invoke a popup menu, as illustrated in Figure 23-3,
and then clicking the Inhibit/Uninhibit command. If the Inhibit/Unin-
hibit command is selected when the status is Available, then the
SS7 link inhibit procedure will be initiated for the selected link. If the
Inhibit/Uninhibit command is selected when the status is Unavailable, then the inhibit status will be removed from the selected link.
T1
Channel
The DS port that is being monitored.
The channel on the DS port that is being monitored.
The Refresh button located at the bottom of the SS7 Status window can be pressed at any time to retrieve the current SS7 link states from the APmax system.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-301Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 23 - SS7 Status
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-302Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 24 - Daily Log Analysis Tool
Chapter 24 - Daily Log Analysis Tool
24.1 Daily Log Analysis Tool
The Daily Log Analysis Tool processes the APmax error log files on a daily basis and summarizes the results into an easy-to-read overview of the APmax performance. The log analysis report is a condensed, useful accounting of the error logs from the previous day and draws attention to the most critical issues pertaining to the APmax performance at the beginning of the log analysis file. These results are delivered to a previously configured e-mail address. Each APmax unit will generate a daily analysis report, which will be delivered in separate e-mails.
Each log analysis e-mail also contains the previous days ap_error.log file for the applicable unit.
The compressed attachment file may be no larger than 100 KB. In the event that the file size surpasses this limit, the feature will only deliver the last 1,000 lines of the error file.
Note: The Daily Log Analysis Tool requires the Log Analysis package to be installed on the selected system.
24.1.1 Setting Administrator E-mail Address
To receive the daily log analysis files, open the Internet Access Settings interface (see Chapter 11
- "Internet Access Settings") in the APmax UI, and configure the Administrator E-Mail Address,
Default From Address, and SMTP Server settings within the General tab (see Figure 24-1).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 24-1 Internet Access Settings Window
-303Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
24.1.2 Example of Daily Log Analysis Report
Chapter 24 - Daily Log Analysis Tool
################ Log Analyzer (April 17 2013 Wednesday) ################
System ID: 2552 Serial No: OEM331101336
Unit: 1
Date Range Processed: yesterday ( 4/16/2013 )
#######################################################################
------------------------- Error Log Statistcs ----------------------
Total error log entries: 1604
Total core files: 0
Total dsp core files: 0
Total alarms: 0
Total service restarts: 0
Total unit restarts: 0
----------------------------- Unit uptime -----------------------------
Uptime: 33days, 14hours, 52minutes, 43seconds
----------------------------- Tipc queue stats ------------------------
TIPC receive queue depth: 1
------------------------------- Alarms --------------------------------
Current alarms:
CPU1:
No alarms set
CPU2:
No alarms set
List of alarms generated:
Alarm Name Alarm Type Cpu Cleared
Time none
-------------------------- Core Files---------------------------------none
------------------------- Service Restarts ---------------------------none
-------------------------- Disk Usage ---------------------------------
FileSystem Size Used Available UsedPercentage system 9.2G 4.6G 4.2G 53% var 28G 1.1G 26G 5% vmfs 412G 8.3G 383G 3%
-------------------------- System Info --------------------------------
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-304Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 24 - Daily Log Analysis Tool
No alarms set
ID register = 0x32
Measured voltages:
12V = 12.06V
5V = 4.99V
3.3V = 3.31V
2.5V = 2.56V
1.8V = 1.84V
DSP Core = 1.27V
CPU Core = 1.53V
FPGA core = 1.53V
Eth Switch Core = 1.02V
1.2V = 1.22V
1.5V = 1.53V
Temperatures:
SRIO = 1.25V
Supervisor internal temp = 48C (118F)
DSPs (Q1600) temp = 52C (125F)
Vreg (Q1601) temp = 50C (122F)
Clock generator:
OK
Fan Status:
Fan 1:5578 RPM
Fan 2:5869 RPM
Fan 3:5625 RPM
Fan 4:5672 RPM
------------------------ Packages installed ---------------------------
Package Name Version
FileSystemVersion 1.4.0.5
IsToll 1.0.23.0
CS1500 Announcements Defaults 3.0.91.0
T1s Configuration Defaults 1.0.6.0
VLAN partitioning 4.0.10.0
Voicemail Defaults 3.0.83.0
AnnouncementLibrary 2.0.13.0
RemoteIp 3.0.94.0
Calling Name License Information. 1.0.0.0
Firmware 1.4.1.0
FireWall 4.1.4.0
Announcement Service Interface 4.1.3.0
CS1500 Announcements 4.1.2.0
Calling Name 5.0.17.0
Notify 7.0.17.0
OCM 1.1.31.0
On Demand Conferencing Plus 4.2.7.0
Web Portal 4.1.47.0
Base Package 4.2.82.0
Telephony 4.2.82.0
TriggerRouter 1.0.32.0
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-305Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 24 - Daily Log Analysis Tool
ACD 2.5.41.0
Universal Call Manager 4.2.4.0
TCM 3.1.66.0
Log Analysis 1.0.24.0
Voicemail 6.0.89.0
AudioSubsystem 4.3.33.0
######################## End of Log Analyzer ##########################
24.1.3 Log Analysis File Content Information
All of the log analysis information is divided into subsections, containing information for the specified unit (both CPU 1 and CPU 2) for the previous day. These values are defined as follows:
Log Analyzer
(Heading Date)
System ID
Serial No
Unit
Date Range Processed
Table 24-1 Log Analysis File Definitions
Log Analyzer
The date the log file was generated (Month Day Year Weekday)
The APmax system ID number
The APmax serial number
The APmax unit number
The date for which the log file was created (Yesterday and the date
Month/Day/Year)
Error Log Statistics
The number of error log entries
Total Error Log
Entries
Total Core Files
The number of core files
Total DSP Core
Files
Total Alarms
The number of DSP core files
The number of alarms
Total Service
Restarts
The number of restarts of services
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-306Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 24 - Daily Log Analysis Tool
Total Unit Restarts
The number of times the specified unit restarted
Uptime
Unit Uptime
Number of days, hours, minutes, and seconds the unit has been running since the last reboot
TIPC Queue Stats
Number of TIPC requests in the queue currently
TIPC receive queue depth
Alarms
Alarms that have been set through CPU 1 or CPU 2
Current Alarms
List of alarms generated
The alarm name, alarm type, CPU the alarm is on, and whether the alarm has been cleared
Core Files
DSP Core Files
Service Restarts
File System
Core Files
The core file generated and the name of the service
DSP Core Files
The DSP core file generated and the name of the service
Service Restarts
The service names that have been restarted
Disk Usage
The size of the system, the current amount of disk space used, the current amount of disk space available, and the percentage of disk space used total (for system, var, and vmfs).
List of set alarms
System Info
Alarms set
ID register
APmax hardware revision number
Measured voltages
Status of onboard voltage converters for the APmax
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-307Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Temperatures
Chapter 24 - Daily Log Analysis Tool
Temperature of supervisor internal, DSPs, and Vreg (Celsius and Fahrenheit)
Clock generator
Fan Status
State of T1 clock synchronizer
Current RPM of all four fans
Package Name
Version
Packages Installed
The name of the APmax package that is installed on the unit
The version of the package that is installed on the unit
Max Resources
Used Resources
% used
Resource Name
Package Licenses
The total number of licenses for this resource
The number of used licenses for this resources
The percentage of total licenses that are in use
The resource being licensed (e.g., Notify Subscribers, SIP ACS
Devices, Voicemail Boxes)
Package Name
Version
File Modification
Time
PreStaged Packages
The name of the APmax package that is pre-staged for installation
The version of the pre-staged package
The date this package was downloaded from Innovative Systems
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-308Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Part 5 - Services
Overview
Part 5 provides instructions for using the service management functions that are included in the
APmax UI software.
The following chapters are found in Part 5 - "Services":
• Chapter 25 - "License Viewer"
• Chapter 26 - "Subscriber Management"
The Services icon in the APmax UI Command Center represents the licensing and systemwide service data (e.g., subscribers) of all APmax systems being administered by the APmax UI.
System-specific service settings are found in the menus under the appropriate system icon
. The menu options displayed in the figure below are found under the Services icon in all installations of the APmax UI. Additional menu options may be displayed as other services are installed on APmax systems. The interfaces for additional services are not discussed in the
APmax User Manual. Documentation for each additional service (e.g., APmax Voice Mail) is packaged with that service.
Services Menu
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-309Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-310Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 25 - License Viewer
Chapter 25 - License Viewer
The License Viewer interface is used to view the announcement licenses and advanced service licenses found on all APmax systems being managed by this installation of the APmax UI.
Licenses are provided by Innovative Systems and determine the quantity of services supported by each APmax system. Licenses are configured for individual APmax systems, and in some cases, for an individual unit within a system. Additional licensing is required to increase the quantity of services.
To access the License Viewer interface, right-click on the Services icon in the Command
Center window to invoke a popup menu, and select the Licensing | License Viewer command (as
illustrated in Figure 25-1). A License Viewer window similar to Figure 25-2 will be displayed.
Figure 25-1 License Viewer Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 25-2 License Viewer Window
-311Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 25 - License Viewer
The License Viewer window displays a list of the licenses found the systems being managed by this installation of the APmax UI. The list can be sorted by clicking on the column headings. The columns in the list are described below:
System
The name of the APmax system to which this license applies.
Consumer
Resource
License Use
Unit
Distribution Type
Expiration Date
The service or application that is being licensed (e.g. Voice Mail).
The resource within the consumer that is being licensed (e.g. subscribers, mail boxes, ports).
The usage information for this license. The first usage indicator is an x/y fraction where x is the number of used licenses and y is the total number of licenses. To the right of the fraction is a percentage indicator of the licenses that are in use. Additionally, each License Use cell in the table is a bar graph that will fill up from left to right to indicate how many of the licenses are already in use.
The unit, on this APmax system, to which this license applies.
For example, if the Unit value is 1, then the license is only valid for unit 1 on this system. If the Unit value is All, then the license applies to all units on this system.
Determines whether or not licenses used by resources (e.g. subscribers, ports) are maintained when the APmax system is rebooted. A value of Unit indicates the licensing is dynamic, and that no resources (e.g. ports, trunks) associated with this license will remain licensed after the system is rebooted. A value of System indicates the licensing is persistent and the resources (e.g. subscribers, mail boxes) associated with this license will remain licensed after a reboot.
The date on which this license will no longer be valid. A value of
Never indicates the license will not expire.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-312Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Alarm Threshold
Chapter 25 - License Viewer
The percentage of license usage at which an alarm will be set.
Alarms can be viewed using the Alarm Status tool (Chapter 19 -
Note: This function is only available for systems with APmax
Release 4.4 or greater.
A value of “NA” indicates the licensed resource either belongs to a system that does not meet the minimum release requirement, or the licensed resource is a “one-time license” feature that will never run out.
To change the Alarm Threshold, press the Edit button to open
the Edit Alarm Threshold window (Figure 25-3) and select either
“None” (indicating an alarm will never be set for this license) or a percentage of license usage from 5% to 100%. The default
Alarm Threshold value is “None.”
Figure 25-3 Edit Alarm Threshold
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-313Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 25 - License Viewer
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-314Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
26.1 Subscriber Management Interface
The Subscriber Management interface is used manage the advanced service subscribers for all
APmax systems being administered by the APmax UI. The term “subscribers” in this chapter refers to end users that are subscribed to advanced services (e.g. APmax Voice Mail). The terms
“user” and “subscriber” are used interchangeably.
This section provides an overview and general information about managing users of APmax advanced services. The Service Description documents associated with a specific service will provide more details on managing APmax subscribers for that particular service. Subscribers will typically need to be inserted into the APmax system using the Subscriber Management interface before they can be subscribed to an advanced service.
The presentation of the Subscriber Management interface depends on the options selected in the
User Preferences section of the APmax UI (see Section 3.3.4 - "User Preferences"). The floating
(window) and docked presentations of the Subscriber Management interface have the same fields, controls, and functions.
If the Subscriber Management interface is not automatically displayed when the APmax UI is started, then right-click on the Services icon in the Command Center window to invoke a
popup menu and select the Subscriber | Management command (as illustrated in Figure 26-1). A
Subscriber Management window similar to Figure 26-2 will be displayed.
Figure 26-1 Subscriber Management Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-315Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-2 Subscriber Management Interface (Floating View)
If the “Docked” option for the Subscriber Management Location setting in APmax UI User Preferences is selected, then the Subscriber Management interface will be docked at the bottom of the
APmax UI window (see Figure 26-3).
Figure 26-3 Subscriber Management Interface (Docked View)
The pin button in the upper right-hand corner of the docked Subscriber Management interface can be clicked to “pin” or “unpin” the docked interface. When the Subscriber Management interface is pinned it will always be displayed and will remain on top of any other windows opened in the APmax UI. When the Subscriber Management interface is unpinned it will be minimized to
the Subscriber Management tab will show the interface and give the user the opportunity to pin interface if they wish.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-316Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-4 Subscriber Management Tab
The Subscriber Management interface is partitioned into the Subscribers section (see Section
26.1.1) and three tabs: General Info (see Section 26.1.2), Address Info (see Section 26.1.3), and
Internet (see Section 26.1.4). Each section is discussed below.
26.1.1 Subscribers Section
The Subscribers section (Figure 26-5) is located on the left-hand side of the Subscriber Manage-
ment interface. The top portion of this section displays a list of the subscribers that have been
The Subscribers list has four tiers of subscriber-related items. The first tier, indicated by icons, represents subscriber names. The second tier, indicated by icons, represents one or more billing service addresses associated with the subscriber. The third tier contains a list of services and service groups that have been added to a billing service address. The fourth tier is a list of services that have been added to a service group. Icons can be double-clicked to hide or show the tiers below them. Right-clicking on any subscriber name, billing service address, service group, or service icon will result in a popup menu with commands related to the selected icon. These
commands are described in Section 26.1.1.2 - "Subscribers List Commands".
Figure 26-5 illustrates a Subscribers list with five subscriber records (four collapsed, one
expanded). The expanded subscriber has two billing service addresses. One of the subscriber’s billing service addresses has nine services associated with it, and the other address has one service and two service groups. One service group is subscribed to two services, and the other is subscribed to one service.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-317Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-5 Subscribers Section
The lower portion of the Subscribers section contains buttons for performing the following functions:
• Removing all query results from the list is done by pressing the Clear button.
• Adding Subscribers - (see Section 26.1.1.3)
• Deleting Subscribers - (see Section 26.1.1.4)
• Adding Billing Service Addresses - (see Section 26.1.1.5)
• Deleting Billing Service Addresses - (see Section 26.1.1.6)
• Adding Service Groups - (see Section 26.1.1.7)
• Deleting Service Groups - (see Section 26.1.1.8)
• Adding Services - (see Section 26.1.1.9)
• Deleting Services - (see Section 26.1.1.10)
Selecting a subscriber, billing service address, or service group icon in the Subscribers list will display information pertaining to the selected item in the tabs located on the right-hand side of the interface. See the following sections for more information on the subscriber settings that are managed in each tab.
• Section 26.1.2 - "General Info"
• Section 26.1.3 - "Address Info"
• Section 26.1.4 - "Subscriber Internet Access Settings"
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-318Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Selecting an advanced service icon in the Subscribers list will display settings for that service on the right-hand side of the Subscriber Management interface. The Service Description documents associated with a specific advanced service will provide more details on managing subscribers for that particular service.
26.1.1.1 Gathering Subscriber Information
To retrieve subscriber information from the APmax system, follow these steps:
1. Use the selection box in the upper left-hand corner of the Subscriber Management interface to choose the type of identification you wish to use to locate the subscriber. The types of identification are described below these steps.
2. Enter the appropriate identification value (e.g., 10-digit directory number, e-mail address) of the subscriber into the field next to the Find button. This value must match the type of identification that is selected.
3. Press the Find button. Once the Find button has been pressed, the subscriber information retrieval process will begin. When the retrieval process is complete, all subscribers matching the entered criteria will be displayed in the Subscribers list on the left-hand side of the Subscriber Management interface. Subscribers from previous searches will remain in the Subscribers list unless the Clear button is pressed prior to the search.
The standard types of identification are described below:
Phone Number
Search for subscribers by entering a 9 or 10-digit phone number. If the number entered has nine digits, then the space is treated as a wildcard character. For example, entering 605-
555-100 (see Figure 26-6) and pressing the Find button will
result in information for all subscriber phone numbers beginning with 605-555-100 being retrieved.
Figure 26-6 Finding Subscribers
E-mail Address
Billing Account
Number
SIP Address
Name
Search for subscribers by entering their e-mail address.
Search for subscribers by entering their billing account number.
Search for subscribers by entering their SIP address.
Search for subscribers by entering their name.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-319Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Additional types of identification may be used to find subscribers, depending on the services that have been installed on the APmax system. For example, Mailbox Number may be used to find subscribers if the Voice Mail Service is installed, and Conference ID may be used to find subscribers if the On-Demand Conferencing Service or Large Scale Conferencing Service are installed.
26.1.1.2 Subscribers List Commands
Items in the Subscribers list will display a popup menu when the right-hand mouse button is clicked while the mouse pointer is positioned over the item. The right-click menu commands for subscriber, billing service address, service group, and service icons are described below.
Subscriber Menu Commands
Right-clicking on a subscriber icon will display a popup menu (see Figure 26-7) with the follow-
ing commands:
• Refresh Subscriber - Select this command to re-query the APmax system for the current data for the selected subscriber record.
• Clear Subscriber from Search - Select this command to remove the selected subscriber from the Subscribers list.
Figure 26-7 Subscriber Right-Click Menu
Billing Service Address Menu Commands
Right-clicking on a billing service address will display a popup menu (see Figure 26-8) with the
Move Billing Service Address command. This command can be used to create a new subscriber account for the selected billing service address, or to merge the billing service address with an existing account.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-320Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-8 Billing Address Right-Click Menu
Selecting the Move Billing Service Address command displays the Move Billing Service Address
Figure 26-9 Move Billing Service Address
Enter the new Billing Account Number for this billing service address.
• If the entered account number already exists then the Billing Service Address selection box will list the addresses already defined for the entered account number and you will have the option to check the Sub-Account box to join the billing account as a sub-account. If the Sub-
Account box is checked when the OK button is pressed then a prompt to join as a sub-
account will be displayed (see Figure 26-10). Choosing Yes in the Join as Sub-Account
prompt will add the selected billing service address and all of its associated services as a sub-account underneath the selected Billing Service Address.
Figure 26-10 Join as Sub-Account
• If the entered account number already exists, but the Sub-Account box is not checked then a prompt to merge the selected billing service address with the existing account will be dis-
played when the OK button is pressed (see Figure 26-11). Choosing Yes in the Merge Bill-
ing Account prompt will add the selected billing service address and all of its associated
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-321Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management services as a new billing service address underneath the subscriber with the account number
entered in the Move Billing Service Address window (Figure 26-9). The pre-existing bill-
ing addresses and services underneath the subscriber will not be replaced during the merge.
Figure 26-11 Merge Billing Account Prompt
• If the entered account number does not exist, a prompt to create a new billing account will
be displayed (see Figure 26-12) when the OK button is pressed. Choosing Yes in the Create
New Billing Account prompt (Figure 26-12) will effectively change the Billing Account
Number of the selected billing service address to the account number entered in the Move
Billing Service Address window (Figure 26-9). If the selected billing service address is the
only address defined for the subscriber, then the subscriber record will remain the same, with the exception of having the newly entered Billing Account Number. If the subscriber has multiple billing service addresses, then the selected address will be removed from the subscriber and will be displayed as a new subscriber record in the Subscribers list. The new subscriber record will have the newly entered Billing Account Number, but will retain the
Name of the original subscriber record.
Figure 26-12 Create New Billing Account Prompt
Service Group Menu Commands
Right-clicking on a service group icon will display a popup menu, as seen in Figure 26-13.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-322Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-13 Service Group Right-Click Menu
The following commands are available in the service group popup menu:
• Move Service Group - This command is used to reassign the service group to a different billing service address within the same subscriber account. Selecting this command will
display a Move Service Group window (Figure 26-14) populated with a drop-down list of
available billing addresses. Choose an address and press the OK button to complete the move to the new address.
• Detach Service Group - This command is used to remove the service group from the current billing service address and create a new subscriber account with the settings and services of the service group. Selecting this command will display the Detach Service Group
window (Figure 26-15). Enter a unique Billing Account Number and press the OK button to
complete the upgrade of the service group to a subscriber account.
Figure 26-14 Move Service Group
Figure 26-15 Detach Service Group
Service Menu Commands
Right-clicking on an advanced service icon will display a popup menu (see Figure 26-16) with the
Refresh Service Information command, which can be selected to re-query the APmax system for the currently selected service’s data.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-323Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-16 Service Right-Click Menu
26.1.1.3 Adding Subscribers
To create a new subscriber, begin by pressing the Add button located below the Subscribers list in
the Subscriber Management interface. An Add New Subscriber window similar to Figure 26-18
will be displayed. If there are subscribers in the Subscribers list, then a drop-down menu will be
displayed (see Figure 26-17) and the Add New Subscriber menu command must be selected
before the Add New Subscriber window will be opened.
Figure 26-17 Add New Subscriber Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 26-18 Add New Subscriber Window
-324Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Enter the information of the new subscriber into the fields (described below) of the Add New
Subscriber window.
Name
Enter the name or a short description of the subscriber. The entered value does not have to be unique and is used in various interfaces to help identify the subscriber.
System
Phone Number
Billing Account
Number
Billing Service
Address
Select the APmax system on which the new subscriber record will be located.
Enter the default 10-digit directory number associated with this subscriber.
The default subscriber phone number can be changed by adding a new 10-digit phone number in the Address Info tab (see
Section 26.1.3) and then selecting that new number in the
Default Phone Number field in the General Info tab (see Section 26.1.2).
Shortened phone numbers ranging from 7 to 9 digits may be automatically added to the Address Info tab depending on the settings in the Phone Number Format interface described in
Enter the account number used by the billing system for this subscriber. This field is not constrained to be unique and therefore multiple subscribers may have the same billing account number.
This field is typically a postal address, but may be another location.
The CASS button next to the Billing Service Address field is an optional feature that uses the CASS™ system to improve the accuracy of the billing address by verifying it with the United
States Postal Service®. To certify an address, follow these steps:
1.
Enter a postal address (address, city, state and zip code) into the Billing Service Address field.
2.
Press the CASS button. If the entered address matches the certified address then nothing will happen.
If the entered address does not match the certified address then an Address Change window similar to
Figure 26-19 will be displayed, showing the originally
entered address and the certified address. Press Yes in the Address Change window (if displayed) to update the Billing Service Address field with the certified address.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-325Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-19 Address Change for CASS Certification
Service
Select a default service (e.g., Terminating Call Management,
Voice Mail) to be configured for this subscriber. This field is optional and may be left blank.
If a default service is selected then an additional service configuration window may be displayed when this subscriber is added. The service description for the selected service will contain more information about any additional service configuration needed for this subscriber.
Press the OK button in the Add New Subscriber window. The new subscriber will be displayed in the Subscribers list and will have a default billing service address of “Location 1,” as illus-
trated in Figure 26-20. The billing service address can be edited in the General Info tab (see Sec-
tion 26.1.2). Advanced services may now be added to the subscriber (see Section 26.1.1.9).
Figure 26-20 New Subscriber Record
26.1.1.4 Deleting Subscribers
To delete a subscriber, select the subscriber name in the list on the left-hand side of the Subscriber Management interface and press the Delete button located below the list. A delete confir-
mation prompt will be displayed (see Figure 26-21). Press the Yes button in the prompt to remove
the subscriber and all addresses, services and other settings associated with the subscriber. Press the No button to cancel the deletion.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-326Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-21 Delete Subscriber Prompt
26.1.1.5 Adding Billing Service Addresses
Each subscriber on an APmax system has a default billing service address, which is created when the subscriber is added to the system. It is typically a postal address, but it may be some other location. If a subscriber has services at more than one location they may need additional billing service addresses.
Address menu command (see Figure 26-22) . A window similar to Figure 26-23 will be dis-
played.
Figure 26-22 Add New Billing Service Address Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 26-23 Add New Billing Service Address Window
-327Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Enter the information of the new billing service address into the fields (described below) of the
Add New Billing Service Address window and press the OK button. A new billing service address icon will be displayed in the Subscribers list below the subscriber record. The billing
service address can be edited in the General Info tab (see Section 26.1.2). Advanced services may
now be added to the new billing service address (see Section 26.1.1.9).
Name
The name or short description of the subscriber that is used in various interfaces to help identify the subscriber. This field is read-only and can only be edited when the subscriber record is
selected (see Section 26.1.2).
System
Phone Number
Billing Account
Number
Billing Service
Address
Select the APmax system on which all services added to this address will be located.
Enter the default 10-digit directory number associated with this billing address.
The default phone number can be changed by adding a new
10-digit phone number in the Address Info tab (see Section
26.1.3) and then selecting that new number in the Default
Phone Number field in the General Info tab (see Section
Shortened phone numbers ranging from 7 to 9 digits may be automatically added to the Address Info tab depending on the settings in the Phone Number Format interface described in
The account number used by the billing system for this subscriber. This field is read-only and can only be edited when the
subscriber record is selected (see Section 26.1.2).
This field is typically a postal address, but may be another location.
The CASS button next to the Billing Service Address field is an optional feature that uses the CASS™ system to improve the accuracy of the billing address by verifying it with the United
States Postal Service®. To certify an address, follow these steps:
1.
Enter a postal address (address, city, state and zip code) into the Billing Service Address field.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-328Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
2.
Press the CASS button. If the entered address matches the certified address then nothing will happen.
If the entered address does not match the certified address then an Address Change window similar to
Figure 26-24 will be displayed, showing the originally
entered address and the certified address. Press Yes in the Address Change window (if displayed) to update the Billing Service Address field with the certified address.
Service
Figure 26-24 Address Change for CASS Certification
Select a default service (e.g., Terminating Call Management,
Voice Mail) to be configured for this subscriber. This field is optional and may be left blank.
If a default service is selected then an additional service configuration window may be displayed when this subscriber is added. The service description for the selected service will contain more information about any additional service configuration needed for this subscriber.
26.1.1.6 Deleting Billing Service Addresses
To delete a billing service address from a subscriber, select the appropriate billing service address icon in the Subscribers list and press the Delete button located below the list. A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed. Press Yes in the prompt to complete the deletion. If services are currently assigned to the billing service address then an error will occur and the delete will be aborted.
Attempting to delete the only billing service address for a subscriber will result in a warning (see
Figure 26-25) that doing so will also delete the subscriber and any data associated with the sub-
scriber.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-329Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-25 Delete Subscriber Warning
26.1.1.7 Adding Service Groups
If more than one subscriber exists at the same location then a service group may be added to the billing service address. Advanced services can be added and managed independently for each service group at a billing service address, but the primary subscriber account and all service groups attached to the subscriber will share the same billing account number. Service groups that have already been added to a billing service address are shown below the associated billing service address icon in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber Management interface (illustrated in
To add a service group to a billing service address, select the address and press the Add button at
the bottom of the Subscribers list. A drop-down list (see Figure 26-26) will be displayed. Select
the Add New Service Group menu command in the drop-down list. An Add New Service Group
window similar to Figure 26-27 will be displayed.
Figure 26-26 Add New Service Group Menu Command
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 26-27 Add New Service Group Window
-330Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Enter the information of the new service group into the fields (described below) of the Add New
Service Group window. The Billing Account Number and Billing Service Address fields default to the values of the parent subscriber and cannot be changed.
Name
Enter the name or a short description of the service group. The entered value does not have to be unique and is used in various interfaces to help identify the service group.
System
Phone Number
Billing Account
Number
Billing Service
Address
Service
Select the APmax system on which the new service group record will be located.
Enter the default 10-digit directory number associated with this service group.
The default service group phone number can be changed by adding a new 10-digit phone number in the Address Info tab
(see Section 26.1.3) and then selecting that new number in the
Default Phone Number field in the General Info tab (see Section 26.1.2).
Shortened phone numbers ranging from 7 to 9 digits may be automatically added to the Address Info tab depending on the settings in the Phone Number Format interface described in
The account number used by the billing system for this service group.
This field is typically a postal address, but it may be some other location.
Select a default service (e.g., Terminating Call Management,
Voice Mail) to be configured for this service group. This field is optional and may be left blank.
If a default service is selected then an additional service configuration window may be displayed when this service group is added. The service description for the selected service will contain more information about any additional service configuration needed for this subscriber.
Press the OK button in the Add New Service Group window. The new service group will be displayed in the Subscribers list. Advanced services may now be added to the service group (see
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-331Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
26.1.1.8 Deleting Service Groups
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
To delete a service group, select the service group name in the list on the left-hand side of the
Subscriber Management interface and press the Delete button located below the list. A delete
confirmation prompt will be displayed (see Figure 26-28). Press the Yes button in the prompt to
remove the service group and all other settings associated with the service group. Press the No button to cancel the deletion.
Figure 26-28 Delete Service Group Prompt
26.1.1.9 Adding Subscriber Services
Subscribers in the APmax system have one or more billing service addresses. Each billing service address may have one or more advanced services or service groups added to it. Services that have already been added to a billing service address or service group are shown below the associated billing service address icon or service group icon in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber
Management interface (illustrated in Figure 26-5).
To add an advanced service to a billing service address or service group, select the address or service group and press the Add button at the bottom of the Subscribers list. A drop-down list of
available services similar to Figure 26-29 will be displayed. Select the service you wish to add
from the drop-down list. Depending on the service, some variation of an “Add Subscriber” window will be displayed, containing all of the required fields that must be populated to subscribe to the selected service. Enter the requested data into the fields and press the OK button to complete the subscription procedure. More information on each service listed in the Add button menu is available in the Service Description document associated with each service.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Figure 26-29 Add Button Service Menu
-332Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
26.1.1.10 Deleting Subscriber Services
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
To delete an advanced service from a billing service address or service group, select the service in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber Management interface and press the Delete button at the
bottom of the list. A delete confirmation prompt (see Figure 26-30) will be displayed. Select Yes
in the prompt to complete the deletion.
Figure 26-30 Delete Service Prompt
26.1.2 General Info
The General Info tab (see Figure 26-31) is displayed when the Subscriber Management interface
is initially opened. It is used to manage a variety of subscriber settings that are associated with the subscriber’s billing service addresses and service groups. To view and edit the contents of the
General Info tab, expand the subscriber’s icon in the Subscribers list on the left-hand side of the Subscriber Management interface, and then select a billing service address or service group
, as illustrated in Figure 26-31.
Figure 26-31 General Info Tab
The subscriber settings found in the General Info tab are described below:
Name
A non-unique name or description of this subscriber or service group. This field defaults to the name entered when the subscriber or service group was added. Editing this name for a subscriber record will change it for all billing service addresses defined for the subscriber.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-333Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Billing Account Number
The account number used by the billing system for this subscriber. This field is not constrained to be unique and therefore multiple subscribers may have the same billing account number. Editing the value for this field will change it for all billing service addresses and service groups defined for this subscriber.
Billing Service Address
This field is typically a postal address, but may be another location.
The CASS button next to the Billing Service Address field is an optional feature that uses the CASS™ system to improve the accuracy of the billing address by verifying it with the United
States Postal Service®. To certify an address, follow these steps:
1.
Enter a postal address (address, city, state and zip code) into the Billing Service Address field.
2.
Press the CASS button. If the entered address matches the certified address then nothing will happen.
If the entered address does not match the certified address then an Address Change window similar to
Figure 26-32 will be displayed, showing the originally
entered address and the certified address. Press Yes in the Address Change window (if displayed) to update the Billing Service Address field with the certified address.
Figure 26-32 Address Change for CASS Certification
Default Phone Number
The 10-digit directory number associated with this billing service address or service group. This field is configured separately for each of the subscriber’s billing service addresses and service groups. The default value for the first billing service address is the phone number entered when the subscriber record was created.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-334Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
All 10-digit phone numbers defined in the Address Info tab (see
Section 26.1.3) for this billing service address or service group
will be listed in this selection box and may be selected to change the value of this field. The currently selected phone number in this field cannot be deleted from within the Address
Info tab. This number cannot be changed to a 7-digit phone number or a phone number used by another billing service address or service group.
Changing this number will display a prompt (Figure 26-32)
which provides the option of updating the phone numbers of the services associated with this billing service address or service group.
Figure 26-33 Prompt to Update Subscriber Services
Time Zone
Dial By Name Digits
System Name
The time zone that will be used for all time-related functions involving this billing service address. This field is unique to each billing service address defined for this subscriber and therefore changing it will not alter the time zone for any other billing service addresses.
The digits used by features, such as Automated Attendant mailbox configurations in the Voice Mail Service, to find this subscriber in a group. The default value is the telephone keypad numbers corresponding to the first three letters in the subscriber name that is entered when the subscriber or service group record is first created. These digits will not be automatically updated if the name is edited, but may be manually changed to any string of digits up to nine digits in length.
The APmax system on which this billing service address or service group record exists. This field cannot be changed.
Any changes to these settings can be saved immediately by pressing the Save button. Settings will be automatically saved when the Subscriber Management interface is closed, another subscriber is selected, the Find button is used, or the Clear button is used.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-335Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
In addition to managing the standard billing service address settings, the General Info tab is also used to display Census Track and Block information, and Innovative Systems GIS (Geographic
Information System) location data for billing service addresses. This data will only be available if the Innovative Systems GIS application is installed on the computer running the APmax UI software. See the Innovative Systems GIS support documentation for more information.
26.1.3 Address Info
The Address Info tab contains all of the phone numbers, e-mail addresses, SIP addresses, and
Centrex extensions associated with the billing service address or service group currently selected in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber Management interface. At the very least a subscriber will
have their default phone number listed in the Address Info tab. Instructions for adding (see Sec-
tion 26.1.3.1) and removing (see Section 26.1.3.2) addresses are given below.
Figure 26-34 Address Info Tab
26.1.3.1 Adding Addresses
To add an address to a billing service address, first press the Add button located below the Sub-
scriber Addresses list to display the Add New Address window. By default, the Address Type
selected in the Add New Address window will be Phone Number (see Figure 26-35).
Figure 26-35 Add New Phone Number
Next, select the type of address you wish to add. Options include Phone Number (Figure 26-35),
E-Mail (Figure 26-36), SIP Address (Figure 26-37), and Centrex Extension (Figure 26-38). The
formatting of the Address field will change depending on which Address Type is selected.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-336Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Note: The Centrex Extension address type is only available if APmax Release 4.5.7 or greater is installed on the system hosting the subscriber record.
Figure 26-36 Add New E-mail Address
Figure 26-37 Add New SIP Address
Figure 26-38 Add New Centrex Extension Address
After selecting the Address Type, enter a properly formatted value (as illustrated in the figures above) into the Address field and press the OK button. If the Address Type is Centrex Extension
then a custom Centrex group name may be specified, as illustrated in Figure 26-38.
The new address will be displayed in the Subscriber Addresses list. If the new address is a 10digit phone number then it will now be available to this billing service address or service group as
a Default Phone Number option in the General Info tab (see Section 26.1.2).
26.1.3.2 Deleting Addresses
To delete a phone number, e-mail address, SIP address, or Centrex extension associated with a billing service address or service group, select the address to delete in the Subscriber Addresses
list and press the Delete button located below the list. A delete confirmation prompt (see Figure
26-39) will be displayed. Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the deletion, or press the
No button to cancel the deletion.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-337Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Figure 26-39 Delete Address Prompt
NOTE: The last phone number address cannot be deleted if the subscriber has a service that requires a phone number.
26.1.4 Subscriber Internet Access Settings
The Internet tab (see Figure 26-40) is used to configure the Internet Access account settings for
the billing service address or service group currently selected in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber Management interface.
Figure 26-40 Internet Tab
The top of the Internet Access Setup section contains the following settings:
Username
The username of this Internet Access account. This name must be unique among subscribers associated with the same
Internet Access service provider and is used by the end user subscriber to log into the Web Portal Service user interface
(see the Web Portal Service Description for more information).
The Username can be created or changed by pressing the
Setup button (see Section 26.1.4.1).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-338Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Active
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Whether or not this Internet Access account is active for this billing service address. Select Yes or No. The default value is
No.
Password Change
Set to Yes to force the user to change their password the next time they log into the Web Portal Service user interface. The default value is No.
There are three buttons in the Internet tab: Setup, Web Portal and Unlock. The Setup button is
used to configure the username and password of the account and is described in Section 26.1.4.1.
The Web Portal button is used to view the Web Portal Configuration interface (see Section
26.1.4.2 - "Web Portal Setup") for this subscriber. The Unlock button is used to manually reset
the failed login count for an Internet Access account to zero. For more information on Internet
Access account security, see Section 11.3 - "Password Management".
26.1.4.1 Internet Access Setup
Press the Setup button in the Internet tab of the Subscriber Management interface to open the
Internet Access Settings window (Figure 26-41), which is used to create or modify the username
and password of the selected account.
Figure 26-41 Internet Access Settings
The account properties in the Internet Access Settings window are described below:
Sign In Name
The username of this Internet Access account. This name must be unique among subscribers associated with the same
Internet Access service provider and is used by the end user subscriber to log into the Web Portal Service user interface
(see the Web Portal Service Description for more information).
The Sign In Name text is not case-sensitive and may contain any combination of letters, numbers, and the following symbols: period, hyphen, underscore, at sign. The minimum length of the Sign In Name is 1, and the maximum length is unlimited.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-339Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Password
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
The password of this Internet Access account. This password is used in conjunction with the Sign In Name to allow the subscriber to log into Internet Access user interfaces. The Password text is case-sensitive and may contain letters, numbers, and the following symbols: hyphen, underscore. The minimum length of the Password is determined by the Password
Strength setting. The maximum length is 20 characters.
Verify Password
New or changed passwords must be entered into this field along with the Password field to verify the password has been typed correctly.
Password Strength
This meter is used to indicate the strength of a new password.
Passwords for previously configured accounts will always indicate a Password Strength of “Weak” since the password is encrypted on the APmax and the APmax UI cannot calculate its strength. The minimum strength required for new passwords is configured on a per-system basis in the Internet Access Set-
tings interface (see Section 11.3 - "Password Management").
Password strength is determined by number of characters, type of characters (uppercase, lowercase, numbers, symbols), and whether or not the password includes common words found in the internal dictionary. The four levels of password strength are described below:
• Weak - Any password that is not Medium, Strong, or Best.
• Medium - Any password with 8 or more characters that has at least two different types of characters and does not directly match words in the internal dictionary.
• Strong - Any password with 8 or more characters that has at least three different types of characters and does not match any variation of a word in the internal dictionary.
• Best - Any password with 14 or more characters that has at least three different types of characters and does not match any variation of a word in the internal dictionary.
Press the OK button in the Internet Access Settings window to save any changes to the account settings.
26.1.4.2 Web Portal Setup
Press the Web Portal button in the Internet tab of the Subscriber Management interface to view
the Web Portal Configuration interface (see Figure 26-42) for this subscriber. The Web Portal
Configuration interface provides shortcuts to the enhanced service settings that are required for this subscriber to have full access to the Web Portal Service user interfaces (see the “Integrated
Web Portal Subscriber Management” section in the Web Portal Service Description for more information).
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-340Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
AP
MAX
User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
NOTE: Notify Plus Service subscribers should not be enabled for Integrated Web Portal features as they are incompatible. See the Feature Interaction section of the Notify Plus Service Description for more information.
Figure 26-42 Web Portal Configuration
For each step listed in the Web Portal Configuration interface, there will be either a button to indicate the step has not been completed, or a icon to indicate the step has been completed.
The subscriber illustrated in Figure 26-42 has been configured for the first five steps and has one
step remaining.
Clicking on the button next to a step may automatically configure the step, or it may display a window with additional configuration options related to the selected service. The Service
Description documents associated with each advanced service in the Web Portal Configuration steps will provide more details on configuring and provisioning subscribers for that particular service.
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-341Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Chapter 26 - Subscriber Management
Document: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
-342Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Index
A
Adding a System
Deleting a System
Editing
Restoring Original
C
Icon Definitions
D
Default Subscriber Management 315
Document Number: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Index
Digital Carrier Configuration 95
DS1 Settings
DS3 Settings
Sync Master
E
Ethernet Configuration Wizard 73
Ethernet Switch Information 289
Ethernet Switch Port Statistics 290
F
G
Index-343
H
Hardware
Installation Procedure
Requirements
Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
I
Installation
New Install
Software - APmax UI
L
M
N
P
Properties
Document Number: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Index
Q
R
Scheduling
Index-344
S
Service Subscriber Management 315
Linksets
Adding Subscribers
Address Info
Deleting Subscribers
Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Internet
Package Management
T
Setting the Time
ISUP Trunk Groups
MF Trunk Groups
SIP Trunk Groups
U
User Administration
Access Rights
Add User
Delete User
Document Number: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Index-345
V
W
Web Portal Configuration 163, 189
Index
Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
APmax User Manual - Release 4.3
Index
Document Number: 715025
Version: 4.3.10
Index-346 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
T1 communication channels
SS7 interfaces
Serial port support
Ethernet ports for LAN/WAN/VoIP
Redundant system architecture
Frequently asked questions
The APmax is used to provide advanced TDM and IP telephony features, acting as a Service Control Point in the SS7 Network.
The APmax provides T1 channels, SS7 interfaces, serial ports (RS232/RS449/V.35 capable), and Ethernet ports.
The Ethernet channels are used for inter-unit communication, placement on a local area network (LAN), general maintenance, and VoIP connections.
